BFP Manual On Drills and Ceremonies 2020 Compressed

Department of Interior and Local Government
BUREAU OF FIRE PROTECTION
MANUAL ON
DRILLS AND
CEREMONIES2 0 2 0
MESSAGE
OF THE CHIEF, BFP
In his remarks to the recruits of the army in 1898, Theodore Roosevelt asserted that
“Absolute obedience to every command is your first lesson.”1 This is the fundamental notion as
to why armies in every continent, culture, race, and even throughout our battle-scarred history
have their own system of conducting drills and ceremonies. It is an uncommon knowledge that
the Bureau of Fire Protection descended from a paramilitaristic organization, the Philippine
Constabulary. Therefore, it is of great importance to honor such grand and vibrant ancestry. The
creation of the Bureau of Fire Protection Manual on Drills and Ceremonies not only provides
uniformity in the conduct of drills and ceremonies in the fire service but also celebrates its proud
traditions and history.
Modernization allowed us to perceive drills and ceremonies in another light. In

comparison to its elementary purpose which is to prepare troops for battle, contemporary drills
and ceremonies have primarily two end-goals: First, it is to aid in disciplinary training and
second is to provide a means to develop the esprit de corps and present traditions through
ceremonies. As the Chief of the Bureau of Fire Protection, I strongly encourage the users of this
manual to utilize it in its maximum potential to instill habits of discipline, precision, and
confidence to every fire fighter serving the bureau. Discipline in a sense that every element
must learn to respond to a command with pride and without hesitation. Discipline with a sense
of alertness, urgency, and attention to detail. In addition, I would like to emphasize the
importance of the traditions and customs of our bureau. Hence, it is every fire fighter’s duty to
preserve such. This manual, through providing guidelines in the conduct of different
ceremonies, will be the leading tool in safeguarding and strengthening our traditions and
customs. The Bureau of Fire Protection, in the commencement of its modernization program, is
now in view of expanding its fire protection services with the creation of special units with air
and naval capacity and upgrading its services to meet the demands of the contemporary
society. With this in mind, it is just fitting for the bureau to establish standards in the conduct of
drills and ceremonies so as to expedite the training of these additional units. This manual would
serve as the official rulebook in the conduct of drills and ceremonies.
The reason as to why Baron Friedrich von Steuben authored the first army field manual
in 1779 was to ensure the continuous uniformity and overall effectiveness of the drills. This
manual shares the same goal: the uniformity and standardization of the conduct of drills and
ceremonies in the bureau. Taking this into account, I firmly recommend every element of the
bureau to practice and maintain the procedures and movements provided in this manual. As
part of this organization, let us be one in developing and advancing the fire service to greater
heights in order to serve our primordial goal: to save lives and properties.
1
Department of the Army. 1986. "Drills and Ceremonies." Washington D.C.: US Government Printing Office, December 8.
BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MESSAGE i
FOREWORD
The Bureau of Fire Protection aims to standardize the learning and the
processes by programming and producing a different hue to do such. It always
boils down to the most basic fundamental of all organization of uniformed
personnel, that the idea of uniformity of all movements from drills to operation
should be internalized. Everyone should know that drills and ceremonies play a
vital role in the traditions and norms of the organization, it reflects strength,
shows alertness and manifests discipline in the service.
Drills and ceremonies are ways for us to show respect and honor for
someone ranging from heroic deeds to the burial of a uniformed person who has
passed away. It is one of the first things that a recruit should learn and master
upon entering the service. It helps develop confidence and pride in their actions
and teaches teamwork. It builds a common spirit of enthusiasm, devotion and
comradeship. It continues to honor the tradition of those who have come before
us, and teaching those who are coming in the proper way to respect the flag and
ceremonies and why we do things the way we do.
In the history, drill procedures used by the United States Army today were
developed during the Revolutionary War. The purpose of the drill then was to
instill discipline in American soldiers for them to begin to work as a team. When
the Americans came to the Philippines, it was then the beginning of adoption of
the US Military drills and procedures. In the course of the said adoption, many
changes were incorporated and modifications were formulated through diverse
interpretations, contemporary revisions and alterations that demands for the
construction of standardized procedures of drills and ceremonies in the BFP for
an official reference.
As part of the modernization of our bureau, we recognize the effectivity of

this BFP Manual on Drills and Ceremonies and we encourage each and every
one to internalize and apply everything that is written in this manual in order for
us to contribute in the commitment to transform towards a more resilient, strong
and unified public safety agency.

FOREWORD ii
Dedication

This manual is dedicated to all the unsung heroes of the Bureau of
Fire Protection; for your bravery, gallantry, selfless service, and
unending efforts to unceasingly give your best to achieve great results
in saving lives and properties. It is the BFP’s pride and honor to have
Filipino men and women working together for a fire-safe nation.
We will Never Abandon Hope!
-NAH-

DEDICATION iii
INTRODUCTION
The birth of the Manila Fire Department on August 7, 1901 started the official
history of firefighting in the Philippine Archipelago. The Manila Fire Department was
founded as part of the Department of Streets, Park, Fire and Sanitation which was
organized by the United States – Philippine Commission. Deputy Chief Jacinto Lorenzo,
the first Filipino Fire Chief of the Manila Fire Department, was appointed on October 19,
1935. After the Japanese occupation, several developments such as rehabilitation and
reconstruction of fire stations, acquisition of firefighting equipment and apparatus and
increase of salary of fire fighters were materialized. These developments were followed
by the establishment of several fire stations in the whole archipelago. Then, President
Ferdinand Marcos enacted Presidential Decree (PD) 765 which provided the integration
of all city and municipal police stations, fire departments and jails into the Integrated
National Police (INP). These forces were under the control of the Philippine
Constabulary. The PC, as a major service of the Armed Forces of the Philippines,
served as nucleus of the INP. Thereafter, Republic Act (RA) 6975 otherwise known as
the DILG Act of 1990 was enacted on December 13, 1990 which paved the creation of
the Bureau of Fire Protection under the Department of Interior and Local Government.
Lastly, Republic Act (RA) 9263 otherwise known as the BFP Professionalization Act of
2004 was enacted on June 24, 2004 which further professionalized and upgraded the
qualification standards and appointment in the Bureau of Fire Protection.
According to history, the Bureau of Fire Protection traces its proud origin back to
the Philippine Constabulary- a gendarmerie police force which is paramilitary in nature.
With this, the bureau has embraced the tradition of conducting drills and ceremonies as
part of its holistic training. The fundamental objective of drills and ceremonies is to instill
discipline and unity among the fire fighters serving the bureau. In the conduct of drills,
the commander issues series of commands and orders for the elements to rapidly carry
out. This aims to nurture discipline and unity, therefore, developing such values with the
end goal of emanating these values in other areas of training. Lastly, in the conduct of
ceremonies, the bureau preserves its traditions and practices. This allows the exhibition
of discipline and unity among the fire fighters in the bureau. Therefore, with the bureau’s
paramilitaristic roots, it is essential to establish standard and uniform procedures in
conducting drills and ceremonies.
The BFP Manual on Drills and Ceremonies is composed of two (2) parts: The
first part is primarily focused on the procedures in the conduct of drills. The second part
is dedicated to the conduct of ceremonies. Each part consists of several chapters
discussing the essential features of the said part. Specifically, Part One is composed
of eight (8) chapters. These chapters include discussion on General Drill
Information, Command and the Command Voice, Individual Movement Without Arms
And With Arms, Squad Drill, Platoon Drill, Company Drill, Battalion and Brigade
Formation. The definition of drill terms which are used in this manual is also provided in

INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL iv
Part One. Each chapter is provided with an introduction which states its purpose and
scope and is further divided into sections discussing the chapter’s important points. The
sections are carefully labeled so as to efficiently guide the users of this manual. The
chapters in Part One are specifically designed to inspire organization, chain of
command, and control in the bureau’s units. Further, photos and illustrations are
provided to visually aid the users. Part Two lays down the procedures in the conduct of
ceremonies which includes Military Honors; Parade; Reviews; Colors; Flag Raising and
Retreat Ceremonies; Change Of Command; Oath-taking; Opening/Closing And
Graduation Ceremonies; Military Wedding; Wreath Laying Ceremony; Funeral Honors
And Services; and Protocol and Social Graces. Each chapter is also provided with an
introduction stating the chapter’s purpose and scope, definition, historical background,
and/or features. The procedures in each section are precisely laid down with the
primary goal of enhancing the spirit of solidarity and presenting the bureau’s customs
and traditions through the conduct of ceremonies.
This manual provides procedures in the conduct of drills and ceremonies with the
end goal of uniformity and standardization for all the bureau’s units. The references of
this manual include the Armed Forces of the Philippines (AFP) Manual on Drills and
Ceremonies, the Philippine National Police (PNP) Manual on Drills and Ceremonies,
and the Philippine National Police Academy (PNPA) Manual on Drills and Ceremonies
and the Department of Foreign Affairs (DFA) Handbook on Protocol and Social Graces.
This manual will serve as the official guideline in the education and exercise of drills and
ceremonies of all fire fighters serving the bureau.
It is with grand prestige that we present to you the Bureau of Fire Protection
Manual on Drills and Ceremonies. May this creation contribute to the advancement of
the bureau for greater service to the Filipino people.

INTRODUCTION v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Message of the Chief, BFP i

Foreword ii
Dedication iii
Introduction iv
Table of Contents vi
List of Figures vii
Chapter Title Page
I GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION 1
II COMMANDS AND COMMAND VOICE 11
III INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITHOUT ARMS 19
IV INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITH ARMS 35
V SQUAD DRILL 57
VI PLATOON DRILL 67
VII COMPANY DRILL 77
VIII BATTALION AND BRIGADE FORMATION 83
IX MILITARY HONORS 91
X PARADE 101
XI REVIEWS 107
XII COLORS 121
XIII FLAG RAISING AND RETREAT CEREMONIES 135
XIV CHANGE OF COMMAND CEREMONY 139
XV OATH-TAKING CEREMONY 143
XVI OPENING/CLOSING AND GRADUATION 147

CEREMONIES
XVII MILITARY WEDDING 153
XVIII WREATH-LAYING CEREMONY 161
XIX FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES 167
XX PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL GRACES 185
REFERENCES 263
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 264

TABLE OF CONTENTS vi
List of figures
Figure Title Page
1 Squad Formation (teams in line, elements in line) 59
2 Squad Formation (teams in column, elements in line) 59
3 Squad Formation (teams in file, elements in column) 59
4 Squad Formation (teams abreast, elements in file) 59
5 Platoon Formation (squads in column, elements in line) 68
6 Platoon Formation (squads in lines, elements in line) 68
7 Platoon Formation (squads in file, elements in file) 68
8 Platoon Formation (squads abreast, elements in file) 68
9 Company Formation (platoons in line, squads in column,

78
elements in line)
10 Company Formation (platoons in column, squads in column,

79
elements in line)
11 Company Formation (platoons in column, squads abreast,

79
elements in file)
12 Company Formation (company mass formation, company in

80
mass, platoons abreast, squads abreast, elements in line)
13 Battalion Formation (battalion in line, companies in line,

86
platoons in line, squads in column, elements in line)
14 Battalion Formation (battalion in line, companies in line,

86
platoons in column, squads in line, elements in line)
15 Brigade Formation (brigade in line, battalions in line,

companies in line, platoons in line, squads in column, elements 88
in line)
16 Brigade Formation (brigade in line, battalions in line,

companies in line, platoons in column, squads in column, 89
elements in line)
17 Cordon Honors. 98
18 Battalion Formation with companies in line. 109
19 Battalion Formation with battalion in line. 110
20 Division Formation with Brigades in line, Battalion in mass. 110
21 Reviewing Officer Party. 111
22 Route to be followed by the troops. 113
23 Designated/Appointed area in the vestibule. 157
24 Designated/Appointed area in the altar. 157
25 Recessional. 158
26 Wreath-Laying Ceremony 163

LIST OF FIGURES vii

1

CHAPTER I
GENERAL DRILL
INFORMATION

CHAPTER I- GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION

2

SECTION A
GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION
1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
The BFP Drills and Ceremonies Manual is designed to provide uniformity

and standardization for all BFP units on the conduct of drills and ceremonies. It
includes methods of instructing drills, teaching techniques, individual and unit drills,
manual of arms and other various aspects of basic drill instructions.
This is designed for the use of firefighters of all occupational skill, including
cadets and recruits in the initial training environment. To maintain consistency
throughout the BFP, the procedures prescribed herein shall be adhered to as
closely as possible.
2. OBJECTIVES
a. The BFP prescribes its own drill regulations with the end goal of
cultivating to the full alertness and the presence of mind of each firefighter not only
during drills but also at all times. These attributes of character are essential to the
members of the BFP.
b. In the fire service, firefighters has to learn teamwork. Through drills and
ceremonies, firefighters learn that there can be no orderly movement of men or
units without a precise and united effort and every man learns to play his part in the
squad, platoon, or company.
c. Drills consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon,

company or battalion is moved in an orderly manner from one formation to another.
These movements are executed with smartness, order, and precision. Each
individual in the squad, platoon or company does his part exactly as how he is
supposed to perform.
d. Drills also increase the confidence of junior officers and non-

commissioned officers through the exercise of command, by giving of the proper
commands and by directing the movement of other troops.
e. Ceremonies are formations and movements in which large numbers of

troops participate where they execute movements in unison and precision just like
in the drill. The primary value of ceremonies is in rendering honors, preserving
traditions, and stimulating esprit de corps.
f. Finally, everyone gets a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything

well in joint effort with others. A ceremony provides the same reaction.
After every successful ceremony, every firefighter-participant can proudly claim: “I
was there”.


3

3. DRILL TERMS
ALIGNMENT. It is a straight line upon which several elements or teams are

formed or the dressing of several elements upon a straight line. A unit is aligned,
when it is dressed.
ARMS. This refers to rifles, pistols, or swords to be used in drills.
ARMS SWING. The swinging of arms must be 6 inches straight to the front
and 3 inches straight to the rear of the trouser seams, with knuckles out facing
forward and fingers formed into a fist with the thumb over the forefinger.
BASE. It is the element on which a movement is regulated.
CADENCE. This is the uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or

the number of steps or counts per minute of which a movement is executed. Drill
movements are normally executed at the cadence of quick time or double time.
CENTER (GITNA). The middle point or element of a command. In a platoon

of three squads in line, the second squad from the right is the center. With four
squads in the platoon, the second squad from the right is the center squad, the rule
being that when these are even number of squads/platoons, the right-center
squad/platoon is the center squad/platoon.
COLUMN (SUNURAN). This is a formation in which the elements are placed

one behind another.
COUNTING CADENCE
a. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor

does not count cadence to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm. When a man
gets out of step, he is corrected by the commander who halts the unit and then
moves everybody off in the step. Counting cadence by the group helps to teach
group coordination, cadence, and rhythm. To help a man keep in step, the
commander encourages him to keep his head up and watch the head and
shoulders of the man in front of him. The command is BILANG HAKBANG, KAD.
The command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the ground. The next
time the left foot strikes the ground, the group calls the cadence for 8 steps in a firm
and vigorous manner as follows: ISA, DALAWA, TATLO, APAT… However, this
command must not be executed in a boisterous manner. The good instructor holds
his counting to a minimum.
b. As firefighters begin to master the art of drills, instructors try to create a

spirit of competition among individuals and between units. Although repetition is
necessary when teaching drills, instructors must use competitive drill exercises to
ensure that drills do not become boring or monotonous.
c. Mass commands are used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. These are effective in developing a command voice when instructing a
leadership course. Procedures for using mass commands are discussed in Chapter
2.


4

DEPTH (LALIM). This is the space from front to rear of any formation or a
position including the front and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be
12 inches.
DISTANCE (LAYO). This is the space between elements when the elements
are on behind the other. Between units, it varies with the size of the formation;
between individuals, it is an arm’s length to the front plus six (6) inches or about forty
(40) inches, measured from chest of one man to the back of the man immediately to
his front.
DOUBLE TIME (TAKBONG HAKBANG). This refers to the cadence at a rate

of 180 steps per minute.
ECHELON. This refers to one of the series of elements formed one behind
another. Also a modification of line formation in which adjacent elements are
disposed one in rear of the other.
ELEMENT. This refers to an individual, squad (tilap), platoon (pulutong),

company (balangay), battalion (talupad), regiment (sampanaw) or a larger body,
forming part of a larger body.
EYES RIGHT (KANANG TINGIN). The direction of the face during the eyes
right should be 45 degrees to the right side.
FILE (TUDLING). This refers to two men, the front-rank man and the
corresponding man of the rear-rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file,
which has no rear-rank man, is “blank file”. The term file applies to a single man in
a single rank formation. It is also a single column of men one behind the other.
FLANK (PANIG). The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or column;
The element on the extreme right or left of the line; and a direction at a right angle to
the direction a formation is facing.
FORMATION (HANAY). This is the arrangement of the elements of a unit in

line, in column, or any other prescribed manner.
FRONT (HARAP). This is the direction in which a command faces.
FRONTAGE (HARAPAN). This refers to the space occupied by an element

measured from one flank to the opposite flank. The frontage of a man is assumed to
be twenty-two (22) inches, measured from the right to the left elbow and therefore
does not include twelve (12) inches between all men in line. The frontage of a squad
however includes the intervals between men.
GUIDE (GABAY). This refers to the man whom the command or element
thereof regulates its march. This is often the case in battle or on practice marches.
HEAD (UNAHAN). This is the leading element of a column. To understand

this definition one must remember that an element is a file, squad, platoon,
company, or larger body forming part of a still another larger body.


5

INTERVAL (PAGITAN). This refers to the lateral space between elements on
the same line. An interval is measured between individuals from shoulder to
shoulder; and between formations, this is done from flank to flank. Unit commanders
and those with them are not considered in measuring interval between elements of
the unit with which it is posted. Considered interval between individuals is one (1)
arm’s length. Close interval is the horizontal distance between shoulder and elbow
when the left hand is placed on the left hip.
LEFT (KALIWA). It refers to the left extremity or element of a body.
LINE (LINYA). This refers to a formation in which the different elements are
“abreast of each other” means on the same line. The other vital part of this definition
centers on the word “element”. A section may be an element; therefore if the leading
elements of several sections are on the same line, it becomes a line formation.
LOOSE PIECES. This refers to rifles not used in making stacks.
OBLIQUE (LIHIS). This is an angle between 0 and 45 degrees. (Right/Left

oblique-march is at an angle of 45 degrees.)
ORDER CLOSE (MASINSING PAGITAN). This is the formation in which the

units, in double rank, are separated by intervals greater than that in close order.
PACE. Thirty (30) inches is the length of the full steps in quick time. The pace
at double time is thirty-six (36) inches.
PIECE. The term piece as used in this text means the rifle.
POINT OF THE REST. The point at which a formation begins, especially the
point toward which units are aligned in successive movements. For instance, in
executing “ON RIGHT INTO LINE”, the point of rest is the place where the leading
squad halts.
QUICK TIME (SIGLANG HAKBANG). This refers to the cadence at a rate of

one hundred twenty (120) steps per minute.
RIGHT. This refers to the right extremity or element of a body of troops.
SWORD SWING. The swinging of sword must be 6 inches to the front and 3
inches to the rear of the trouser seams.
SLOW TIME. This refers to the cadence at sixty (60) steps per minute.
STEP (HAKBANG). The distance measured from heel to heel between the
feet of a man walking. A step may be any prescribed number of inches. The half step
and back step is fifteen (15) inches. The right step and the left step are twelve (12)
inches. The steps in quick and double time are thirty (30) and thirty-six (36) inches,
respectively.


6

SUCCESSIVE MOVEMENT (SUNUD-SUNURANG GALAW). A maneuver in
which the various elements of a command execute a certain movement one after
another as distinguished from a simultaneous movement.
TO REVOKE A COMMAND. The cancellation of a command that has not

been carried out, or to start a movement improperly begun from a halt the command,
MANUMBALIK, is given. On this command, the movement stops and the men
resume their former position.
PARTIAL CHANGES OF DIRECTION. This refers to the change of the

direction of a column by forty—five (45) degrees to the left or right, the command is
LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. Further, to execute a slight change of
direction.
PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA). This refers to the command given to

execute a slight change of direction. The guide or guiding elements move in the
indicated direction, and the rest of the unit follows.
NUMBERING UNITS. For drill purposes, platoons within each company are
numbered from right to left when the company is in line and from front to rear when
the company is in column. Squads within each platoon are numbered from right to
left when the platoon is in line and from front to rear when the platoon is in column.
POST. This means the correct place for an officer or non-commissioned

officer to stand. This can be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When changes in
formation involve changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most direct route
and, as soon as practicable, after the command of execution. Officers and non-
commissioned officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the
movements take their posts when the duties are completed. In executing a
movement or facing, and when moving from one post to another, officers and non-
commissioned officers maintain a military bearing and move with smartness and
precision.
a. In movements after the first formation, guidon bearers and special units
maintain their positions with respect to the flank or the end of the unit to which they
were originally posted.
b. In all formations and movements, non-commissioned officers commanding

an element take the same post as prescribed for an officer.
c. When acting as an instructor, the officer or non-commissioned officer goes

wherever his presence is needed to correct mistakes and supervise the performance
of the men in ranks.


7

SECTION B
ENGLISH TO FILIPINO VERSION
1. POSITION OF ATTENTION (KATAYUAN SA PAGTINDING)
• Attention -Humanda
• FalI in Line -Humanay
• At close Interval- Sinsing Pagitan
• Assemble -Magtipon
• As You Were -Manumbalik
2. REST AT THE HALT (KATAYUAN SA PAHINGA NAKAHINTO)
• Parade Rest -Tikas Pahinga

• Stand at Ease -Tindig, paluwag
• At Ease -Paluwag
• Rest -Pahinga
• Fall Out -Tiwalag
• Dismissed -Lumansag
3. FACING AT THE UNIT (PAGHARAP KUNG NAKAHINTO)
• Right Face -Harap sa Kanan, Rap

• Left Face -Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap
• About Face -Harap sa Likod, Rap
• Left Half Face -Harap sa Hating-Kaliwa
• Right Half Face -Harap sa Hating Kanan
• Center Face -Harap sa Gitna,Rap
4. SALUTE (PAGPUGAY)
• Hand Salute- Pugay Kamay, Na

• Eyes Right -Tingin sa Kanan, Na/ Handa ,kanang tingin
5. STEPS AND MARCHING (HAKBANG AT LAKAD)
• Forward March - Pasulong, Kad

• Squad/Platoon/Company/Batallion/Brigade/Division, Halt -
Tilap/Pulutong/Balangay/Talupad/Sampanaw/Bukluran, Hinto
• Mark Time March Patakda, Kad
• Half Step March Hating-Hakbang, Kad
• Double time March Takbong-Hakbang, Kad
• Column Right March -Liko sa Kanan, Kad
• Column Left March -Liko sa Kaliwa, Kad
• Column Half Right March -Liko Hating-Kanan, Kad
• Column Half Left March -Liko Hating-Kaliwa, Kad
• Right Flank March -Kanang Panig, na
• Left Flank March -Kaliwang Panig, na


8

• Right Turn March -Pihit sa Kanan, na
• Right Turn March -Pihit sa Kaliwa, na
• To the Rear, Pabalik, Na
6. CLOSE ORDER DRILL (MALAPITANG PAGSASANAY)
• Dress Right, Dress -Tunton-Kanan,Na

• Dress Left, Dress -Tunton-Kaliwa,Na
• Close Interval, Dress- Sinsing Pagitan, Na
• Ready Front -Handa, Rap
• Guide Right -Gabay sa Kanan
• Guide Left -Gabay sa Kaliwa
• Guide Center -Gabay sa Gitna
• As You were -Manumbalik
• Stand Fast -Manatili/Walang Kilos
• GuidesRight/Left -Gabay sa Kanan/Kaliwa
• Guides on the Line- Gabay Sumahanay
• Post -Sumalunan
• Take Interval to the Right- Ibayong Dalang Mula sa Kanan/Kaliwa, Na
• Assemble to the Right/ Magtipon sa Kanan/
• Left March Kaliwa, Kad
• Open Ranks March Pabukang Taludtod,Kad
• Close Ranks March Masinsing Taludtod,Kad
• Count Off Isahang Bilang,Na
• Count by Twos/Threes/Count Dalawahang/Tatluhang Bilang, Na
• By the Number -Sabay na Bilang
• Counter Column March- Salisihang Hanay, Kad
7. COMMANDS OF PARADE, REVIEW AND CEREMONIES (MGA UTOS SA

PATIKAS, PAGMASID AT MGA SEREMONYA)
• First Call -Unang Panawagan

• Assembly Call -Panawagan sa Pagtitipon
• Guides on the Line -Mga Gabay Sumahanay
• Guides Post –Mga Gabay Sumalunan
• Sir, The Parade is Formed -Ginoo,Handa napo ang Patikas
• Sir, The Battalion is Formed -Ginoo, Handa napo ang Talupad
• Take Your Post -Sumalunan
• Sound Off -Ihudyat
• Sir, The Troop is Ready for -Ginoo,handa napo ang
Tipon/Balangay/Talupad sa
• Inspection -Pagsisiyasat
• Troop the Line- Libutin ang Hanay
• Staff Behind Me -Kalupunan,Sumalikod Ko
• Receive the Report -Tanggapin ang Ulat
• Report -Mag-ulat
• All Present-Narito pong Lahat
• Accounted For -Napag-alaman


9

• Publish the Order -Ipahayag ang Kautusan
• Attention to Order -Makinig sa Kautusan
• Details for Today- Mga Nakatalaga ngayon
• Field Officer of the Day -Pinunong Panlarangan
• Officer of the Day -Pinunong Tagapamahala
• Officer in charge -Pinunong Pangalaga
• By Order -Sa Utos ni
• Officers, Center March -Mga Pinuno, Humarap at Pumagitna,Kad
• Officers, Halt -Mga Pinuno, Hinto
• Officers, Post March -Mga Pinuno,Balik Kad
• Persons to be Decorated - Mga Taong Pararangalan
• Colors ,Centers March -Watawat, Pumagitna Na
• Colors, Reverse March -Watawat,Palit-Lunan Kad
• Sound the Retreat -Ihudyat ang Pagsilong
• Pass- and- Review -Pasa-Masid
• Dismiss your Company -Lansagin ang iyong Balangay
• Take Charge of your Companies -Pamunuan ang iyong Balangay
• Prepare for Inspection -Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat
• Sir, this Concludes the Ceremony -Ginoo, Tapos na po ang Seremonya
• Staff, Behind Me, March- Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko,Kad


10

11

CHAPTER II
COMMANDS AND
COMMAND
VOICE

CHAPTER II- COMMANDS AND COMMAND VOICE

12
SECTION A
COMMANDS
A drill command is an oral order of a leader. The precise movement is
affected by the manner in which the command is given.
The following rules shall govern for a commander in giving a command to

participating troops:
a. When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving a

command. In a command that set the unit in motion (marching from one point to
another), the commander shall move simultaneously with the unit to maintain proper
position within the formation.
b. Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies.
The commander gives command MANUMBALIK (AS YOU WERE) to revoke

a preparatory command that he has given. The command MANUMBALIK must be
given prior to the command of execution. The commander cannot cancel the
command of execution with MANUMBALIK. If an improper command is not revoked,
the personnel execute the movement in the best manner possible. The commander
may then give the appropriate command as necessary.
1. TWO-PART COMMANDS
a. Most drill commands have two parts, the preparatory command and the
command of execution. Neither is a command itself, but the parts are termed
command to simplify instruction. The command HANDA, KANANG, TINGIN are
considered to be two-part commands even though they contain two pre-commands.
i. The preparatory command states the movement to be carried out and

mentally prepares the troop for its execution. In the command PASULONG,
KAD, the preparatory command is PASULONG.
ii. The command of execution tells when the movement is to be carried

out. In PASULONG, KAD, the command of execution is KAD.
b. To change direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory command

and command of execution for each movement are given so they begin and end on
the foot in the direction of the turn: KANANG PANIG, NA (RIGHT FLANK) is given
as the right foot strikes the marching surface and KALIWANG PANIG, (LEFT
FLANK) as the left foot strikes the marching surface. The interval between the
preparatory command and the command of execution is normally one step or count.
2. ENGLISH VERSION TO FILIPINO VERSION
a. The BFP commands were derived from the English version and
subsequently translated to Filipino version. This attempt to localize the English
version has brought about varied interpretations as to the precision of the term being
used. In the command of execution for example, the words RAP, NA, KAD, TA, and


13
others are sometimes misused/interchanged as the commander may opt to what he
thinks is appropriate.
b. To provide for uniformity, simplicity and precision and to suit the Filipino
commands in terms of voice control, distinctiveness, inflections and cadence the
following guidelines are set forth as a rule:
In general, the word NA is used to signal the command of execution

except the following:
i. TA – (Abbreviated SANDATA) manual of arms for rifles and pistol,

except for KALIS and TALIBONG, which fall under combined
command.
ii. KAD – (Abbreviated LAKAD) from at rest to motion. Example:

PASULONG, KAD. For other commands given while in motion, the
general rule will apply. Example: LIKO SA KANAN, NA.
iii. TO – (Abbreviated HINTO) from motion to rest.
iv. RAP – (Abbreviated HARAP) in HANDA HARAP as literal

translation of READY FRONT.
v. DA – (Abbreviated HUMANDA) for attention.
vi. NGA – (Abbreviated PAHINGA) in “TIKAS PAHINGA” or PARADE

REST.
vii. Combined Commands
viii. Supplementary Commands
ix. Mass Commands
x. Directives
3. COMBINED COMMANDS
In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of

execution is combined; for example, HUMANAY (FALL IN), PALUWAG (AT EASE),
LUMANSAG (DISMISS). These commands are given without inflection and at a
uniformly high pitch and loudness comparable to that for a normal command of
execution.
4. SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS
a. Supplementary commands are oral orders given by a subordinate leader to

reinforce and complement a commander’s orders. They ensure proper
understanding and execution of a movement. They extend to the lowest subordinate
leader exercising control over an element for he commands as a separate element
within the same formation.


14
b. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of a
pre-command, or a two-part command. It is normally given between the pre-
command and the command of execution. It is used when a command requires an
element of a unit to execute a movement different from other elements within the
same formation, or the same movement at the time prescribed by the procedures
covering that particular movement. For example, the platoon is in column formation
and the platoon leader commands DALAWAHANG TUDLING SUNUDSURAN
MULA SA KALIWA (pause), KAD. The first and second TUDLING leaders
command PASULONG; the third and forth TUDLING leaders command MANATILI
(STAND FAST). On the command of execution KAD, the first and second squads
march forward. At the appropriate time, the squad leader (third) nearest the moving
element commands LIKO HATING KALIWA, KAD (for both remaining squads). As
the third and fourth squad leaders reach the line of the march, they automatically
execute a LIKO HATING KANAN and obtain normal distance behind the first and
second squads.
c. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right

shoulder except when his command is based on the actions of an element on his left
or when the sub-element is to execute a LIKO SA KALIWA, LIKO HATING
KALIWA or KALIWANG PANIG. Giving commands over the left shoulder occurs
when changing the configuration of a formation, such as forming a file or a column of
four and reforming.
d. Supplementary commands are not given by a sub-leader for the combined

commands HUMANAY, PALUWAG, TIWALAG or for mass drills when his element
forms part of a mass formation. However, supplementary commands are given when
forming a mass or when forming a column from a mass.
e. Except for commands while in mass formation, platoon leaders give

supplementary commands following the commands of the commander. When the
preparatory command is BALANGAY, the platoon leaders immediately come to
attention and command PULUTONG. The company commander allows for all
supplementary commands before giving the command of execution.
f. When no direction is given, the response is understood to be forward. When

no rate of march is given, the response is SIGLANG HAKBANG (QUICK TIME).
This normally happens when a direction or rate of march is included in the pre-
command, or the direction or rate of march is given as a supplementary command.
5. MASS COMMANDS
a. Mass commands may be used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. (They are definitely effective in developing a command voice when
instructing a leadership course).
b. When the instructor wants the unit to use mass commands, he commands
SA INYONG PAG-UTOS (AT YOUR COMMAND). The instructor gives a
preparatory command describing the movement to be performed; for example, face
the platoon to the right. The command of execution is NA (COMMAND). When the
instructor says NA (COMMAND), all personnel in the unit give the command HARAP
SA KANAN (RIGHT FACE), in unison and simultaneously executes the movement.


15
c. To give mass commands while marching, the instructor gives the
preparatory command for the movement and substitutes NA (COMMAND) for the
command of execution NA (MARCH); for example, LIKO SA KANAN, NA
(COLUMN RIGHT, COMMAND); PABALIK, NA (REAR, COMMAND).
d. When the instructor wants to stop mass commands, he commands SA

AKING PAG-UTOS (AT MY COMMAND), the normal method of drilling is then
resumed.
6. DIRECTIVES
a. Directives are oral orders given by the commander that direct or cause a
subordinate leader to take action.
b. The commander gives directives rather than commands when it is more

appropriate for subordinate elements to execute a movement or perform a task as
independent elements of the same formation.
c. Directives are given in sentence form and are normally prefixed by the
terms. Example: IHAYAG ANG KAUTUSAN (PUBLISH THE ORDER).
d. PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG PANGKAT O TILAP, PULUTONG,

BALANGAY (PLATOON LEADER/ COMPANY COMMANDER, TAKE CHARGE)
are the only directive on which commander relinquishes his command and on which
salutes are exchanged.
e. A subordinate Commander upon receiving a directive will resort to the

normal two-part command.
SECTION B
THE COMMAND VOICE
A correctly delivered command will be understood by everyone in the unit.
Correct commands have a tone, cadence and a snap that demand willing, correct
and immediate response.
1. VOICE CONTROL
a. The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of fire officer in the

unit. Normally, the commander is to the front and center of the unit and speaks
facing the unit so that his voice reaches everyone.
b. It is necessary for the voice to have carrying power, but excessive exertion
is unnecessary and harmful. A typical result of trying too hard is the almost
unconscious tightening of the neck muscle to force sound out. This produces strain,
hoarseness, sore throat and worst of all instinct and jumbled sounds instead of clear
commands. Ease is achieved through good posture, proper breathing and correct
adjustment of throat and mouth muscles and confidence.


16
c. The best posture for giving commands is the position of attention. Fire
officers in formation notice the posture of their leader. If his posture is improper
(relaxed, slouched, stiff or uneasy) the subordinates will imitate it.
d. The most important muscle used in breathing is the diaphragm – the large
muscle that separates the chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. The diaphragm
automatically controls normal breathing and used to control the breath in giving
commands.
e. The throat, mouth and nose act as amplifiers and help to give fullness
(resonance) and projection to the voice.
2. DISTINCTIVENESS
a. Distinctiveness depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth
which form the separate sounds of a word and group the sounds into syllables.
Distinct commands are effective; indistinct commands cause confusion. All
commands can be pronounced correctly without loss of effect. Emphasize correct
enunciation (distinctiveness). To enunciate clearly, make full use of the lips, tongue
and lower jaw.
b. To develop the ability to give clear, distinct commands, practice giving

commands slowly and carefully, prolonging the syllables. Then, gradually increase
the rate of delivery to develop proper cadence, still enunciating each syllable
distinctly.
3. INFLECTION
Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.
a. The preparatory command is the command that indicates movement.

Pronounce each preparatory command with a rising inflection. The most desirable
pitch, when beginning a preparatory command, is near the level of the natural
speaking voice. A common fault with beginners is to start the preparatory
commanding a pitch so high that, after employing a rising inflection for the
preparatory command it is impossible to give the command execution with clarity or
without strain. A good rule to remember is to begin a command near the natural pitch
of the voice.
b. The command of execution is the command that indicates when a

movement is to be executed. Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higher pitch
than the last syllable of the preparatory command. It must be given with plenty of
snap. The best way to develop a command voice is to practice.
c. In combined commands, such as HUMANAY (FALL IN) and TIWALAG

(FALL OUT), the preparatory command and command of execution are combined.
Give these commands without inflection and with the uniform high pitch and
loudness of a normal command of execution.


17
4. CADENCE
a. Cadence, in commands, means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words. The

interval between commands is uniform in length for any given troop unit. This is
necessary so that everyone in the unit will be able to understand the preparatory
command and will know when to expect the command of execution. For the squad or
platoon in march, except when the supplementary commands need to be given, the
interval of time is that which allows one step (or count) between the preparatory
command and the command of execution. The same interval is used for commands
given at the halt. Longer commands, such as KANANG PANIG NA (RIGHT FLANK
MARCH) must be started so that the preparatory command will end on the proper
foot and leave a full count between the preparatory command and command of
execution.
b. When the supplementary commands are necessary, the commander

should allow for one count between the preparatory command and the subordinate
leader’s supplementary command and an additional count after the subordinate
command but before the command of execution.


19

CHAPTER III
INDIVIDUAL
MOVEMENTS
WITHOUT ARMS
*The following chapters focus on Drills and Ceremonies movements, nevertheless Uniforms to be used in Drills and
Ceremonies shall be in accordance with the latest approved standard as prescribed by the BFP-NHQ Uniform Committee

CHAPTER III- INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITHOUT ARMS

20
SECTION A
INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS
WITHOUT DRILL ARMS
This chapter contains most of the individual positions and stationery
movements required in drill. This position and the correct execution of the
movement, in every detail, should be learned before proceeding to other drill
movements.
Movements are initiated from the position of attention. However, some rest
movements may be executed from other rest positions.
1. POSITION OF ATTENTION
a. In coming to attention, bring your heels together smartly on the same line.
Hold them as near each other as the conformation of your body permits. Turn you
feet out equally, forming an angle of 45 degrees. Keep your knees straight without
stiffness.
b. Let your arms hang straight down without stiffness, thumbs along the
seams of your trousers. Hold the back of your hands out, with the fingers held
naturally so that the thumbs rest along the tip of the forefingers.
c. Keep your head erect and squarely to the front, your chin drawn in so that
the axis of your head and neck is vertical. Look straight to the front (about 30 yards
ahead).
d. Rest the weight of your body equally on the heels and the balls of your feet.
e. Remain silent and do not move unless otherwise directed.
POSITION OF ATTENTION
front and side view


21

2. REST POSITION AT THE HALT
a. PARADE REST. At the command PAHINGA, or TIKAS, NGA, move your

left foot smartly 12 inches to the left of the right foot. Keep your legs straight so that
the weight of your body rests on both feet. At the same time, your arms hanging
naturally behind your back, just above the belt line, palms flattened to the rear, left
hand under the right hand without stiffness. Remain silent and do not move. This
command is executed from the position of attention only. TINDIG PALUWAG may
be executed from this position.
ONCE ASKED TO RESPOND TO A QUESTION, AN ELEMENT SHOULD STAND

IN ATTENTION FIRST, ANSWER AND ONCE DONE, PROCEED BACK TO
PARADE REST.
PARADE REST
front and side view
b. STAND AT EASE (TINDIG PALUWAG). From Tikas Pahinga, on the

command PALUWAG, a two count movement, execute Position of Attention then
move your left foot smartly 12 inches to the left of the right foot, simultaneously move
your hands in front of you, left hand clasping the right wrist; but can only turn the
head and eyes directly toward the person in charge of the formation.


22
STAND AT EASE
second count movement
To return to position of attention, the command is BALANGAY

(TILAP/PULUTONG/BALANGAY/TALUPAD), DA. On the preparatory command
BALANGAY, execute parade rest (bring arms again just above the belt line). On the
command of execution DA, execute position of attention.
c. AT EASE – from position of attention, the command for this movement is

PALUWAG, the fire officer must remain standing (position of attention) and silent
with his right foot in place; but he can turn his head left or right and bring his hand
forward.
d. FALL OUT
i. At the command TIWALAG, you can leave the ranks but you are
required to remain in the immediate area. You resume your former place at
attention in ranks at the command HUMANAY.
ii. Being at any of the rests except TIWALAG, to resume the position of
attention, the commands are TILAP, DA. At the command TILAP, take the
position of parade rest; at the command DA, take the position of attention.


23

3. EYES RIGHT
a. Used as a courtesy to reviewing officers and dignitaries during parades and

ceremonies. It is a one-count movement and the command is given while marching
at quick time. The command is HANDA, KANANG, TINGIN; HANDA, HARAP.
b. Assume you are halted at attention. Upon the approach of the reviewing
officer, the unit leader will command, TINGIN SA KANAN, NA. On the command of
execution, NA, and for the account of one, all members of the formation will smartly
turn their heads 45 degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front.
There is no command to terminate this movement. When the reviewing officer comes
into your line of vision, you will follow his movements with your head and eyes until
they are straight to the front. At this time the movement is terminated, and you will
remain at the position of attention until given another command.
EYES RIGHT/ TINGIN SA KANAN

when at halt
4. FACING AT THE HALT
a. Facing to the flank is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP SA

KANAN, RAP. On the command of execution RAP, slightly raise the left heel and
right toe, and turn 90 degrees to the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the
ball of the right foot. Keep the right leg straight without stiffness and allow the left leg
to bend naturally. On the second count, place the left foot beside the right foot,
resuming the position of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of
Attention, throughout this movement. When the command is HARAP SA KALIWA,
RAP, the reverse movement shall apply.


24
b. Facing to the rear is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP SA

LIKOD, RAP. On the command of execution RAP, move the toe of the right foot to a
point touching the marching surface about half the length of the foot to the rear and
slightly to the left of the left heel. Rest most of the weight of the heel of the left foot
and allow the right knee to bend naturally. On the second count, turn to the right 180
degrees on the left heel and ball of the right foot, resuming the position the position
of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention, throughout this
movement.
5. HAND SALUTE
a. The hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is PUGAY

KAMAY, NA. When wearing headgear with visor (with or without glasses), on the
command of execution NA, raise the right hand sharply, fingers and thumb extended
and joined, palm facing down, and place the tip of the right forefinger on the rim of
the visor slightly to the right of the right eye. The outer edge of the hand is barely
canted downward so that neither the back of the hand nor the palm is clearly visible
from the front. The hand and wrist are straight, the elbow inclined slightly forward,
and the upper arm is horizontal to the ground with your forearm inclined at 45
degrees.
HAND SALUTE
when wearing headgear with visor


25

b. When wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and not wearing
glasses, execute the hand salute in the same manner as previously described in
sub-paragraph a, except touch the tip of the right forefinger to the forehead near
and slightly at the right of the right eyebrow.
HAND SALUTE
when wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and
not wearing eyeglasses
c. When wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and wearing glasses,
execute the hand salute in the same manner as described in sub paragraph a,
except touch the tip of the right forefinger to that point on the glasses where the
temple piece of the frame meets the right edge of the right brow.
HAND SALUTE
when wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and
wearing eyeglasses


26
d. Ready Front from the hand salute is a one-count movement. The command
is HANDA, RAP. On the command of execution RAP, return the hand sharply to the
side, resuming the position of attention.
NOTE: Hand Salute in a close interval formation shall be done with your right elbow
in front of the left shoulder of the one on your right (see picture below).
NOTE:
a. All BFP personnel in uniform are required to salute when they meet and
recognize persons entitled to the salute.
b. The junior person shall salute first. Accompanying the rendering of the
hand salute with an appropriate greeting such as, "Good Morning, Sir" or "Good
Morning, Ma’am" is encouraged. Personnel will not salute indoors, except when
reporting to a superior officer and when the National Anthem is playing.
c. The practice of saluting officers in official vehicles (recognized individually
by rank or identifying vehicle plates and/or flags) is considered an appropriate
courtesy and will be observed. Salutes are not required to be rendered by or to
personnel who are driving or riding in privately-owned vehicles. When military
personnel are acting as drivers of a moving vehicle, they should not initiate a salute.
d. It is customary to salute officers of friendly foreign nations when recognized
as such.
e. The President of the Philippines, as the Commander-in-Chief, shall be
rendered salute by all personnel in uniform.


27

f. Civilian personnel, to include civilian guards, are not required to render the
hand salute to military personnel or other civilian personnel.
g. Military personnel under arms will render the salute prescribed for the
weapon with which they are armed.
h. All uniformed personnel are required to salute to all color uncased
i. Salutes are required during ceremonial occasions where the Philippine
National anthem/ to the colors is played, this rules applies to National Anthem of
Foreign Nations. It is also required during the sound of honors and on ceremonies
prescribes by BFP.
j. Salutes are not required to be rendered or returned when the senior or
subordinate or both are:
i. In civilian attire.
ii. Engaged in routine work or actual operation and the salute would
interfere.
iii. Carrying articles with both hands so occupied as to make saluting
impractical.
iv. Working as a member of a detail or engaged in sports or social
functions.
v. In public places such as theaters, churches, and in public
conveyances.
6. TAAS KANANG KAMAY/ PANUNUMPA
a. The command is TAAS KANANG KAMAY, NA. On the command of

execution NA, smartly raise the right hand in the Panunumpa position. To return to
position of attention, the command is BABA KAMAY, NA. On the command of
execution NA, smartly bring down the right arm to position of attention.
NOTE: In Panunumpa position in a close interval formation, your right arm shall be at
the back left shoulder of the one on your right (see picture below).


28
7. REMOVE/RETURN HEADGEAR
a. Removing the headgear is a two-count movement. The command is ALIS

KUPYA, NA. On the last note of the preparatory command ALIS KUPYA, the
individual holds the center tip of the visor with the right hand (with the left hand if with
arms) thumb underneath the visor, include the chinstrap if making use of it. And at
the command of execution NA, removes the headgear from the head; bringing the
cap to the side (refer to the pictures below).
Pershing Cap
REMOVE HEADGEAR
on preparatory command (picture on the left)
on command of execution (picture on the right)
Ball Cap


29

b. In returning the headgear, the command is BALIK KUPYA, NA. On the last
note of the preparatory command BALIK KUPYA, replace the headgear with the
same hand used to remove it (if making use of a chin strap, fix the strap in your chin
and hold the visor again) holding the visor with the thumb underneath; at the
command of execution NA bring down the hand smartly to the position of order
arms/attention.
SECTION B
STEPS AND MARCHING
1. TO MARCH AT REST
a. AT EASE MARCH. The command PALUWAG, KAD is given as either foot

strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the fire officer is
no longer required to retain cadence; however, silence and approximate interval and
distance is maintained. SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD and LAYANG HAKBANG,
KAD are the only commands that can be given while marching at ease.
b. ROUTE STEP MARCH. Assume that the individual is marching forward at

quick time and receives the command LAYANG HAKBANG, NA, the command of
execution may be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of
execution, NA, the individual is no longer required to march at the position of
attention in cadence, but the individual must keep his alignment, cover, interval and
distance. The individual will continue to march until given another command. The
only command he may receive while marching at route step is TILAP (PULUTONG)
or (BALANGAY), HUMANDA. On the command of execution, HUMANDA, he will
pick up the step as soon as possible. The Drill Instructor will count cadence until
troops are in step.
2. MARCHING IN PLACE
a. To march in place, the command PATAKDA, NA, is given as the left foot
strikes the marching surface and only while marching with a 30-inch or 15-inch step
forward. On the command of execution NA, take one more step, bring the trailing
foot alongside the leading foot, and begin to march in place. Raise each foot
(alternately) 10 inches above the marching surface; toes pointing downwards,
keeping the arms at the sides as in the position of attention.
b. To resume marching with a 30-inch step the command PASULONG, KAD

is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution
KAD, take one more step in place and then step off with the left foot with a 30-inch
step.
c. Mark Time from double Time in Place. Assume that the individual is double
timing in place and he receives the command, PATAKDA, NA. The command of
execution may be given as the right foot strikes the deck. The command will be as
the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution NA, his next step will be
one more six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (step). His next step will


30
be a two inch vertical step in place with your left foot to the deck. The heel is four
inches from the deck. At the same time, reduce to 120 steps per minute and lower
the arms to the quick time position. He will continue marching in place, taking 120,
two-inch vertical alternation steps per time.
d. The halt from mark time is executed in two counts, basically the same as
the halt from the 30-inch step.
MARCHING IN PLACE/ PATAKDA FORWARD MARCH/PASULONG

as described in Sec B para 2,a as described in Sec B para 2.b
3. DOUBLE TIME MARCH
a. To march in the cadence of 180 steps per minute with a 30-inch step, the
command is TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. It may be commanded while at the halt or
while marching at quick time with a 30-inch step.
b. When at the halt and the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG is

given, shift the weight of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On
the command of execution NA, raise the forearms to a horizontal position, with the
fingers and thumb closed, knuckles out and simultaneously step off with the left foot.
Continue to march with 30-inch steps at the cadence of double time. The arms swing
naturally to the front and rear with the forearms kept horizontal.
c. When marching with a 30-inch step in the cadence of quick time, the
command TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA is given as either foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution NA, take one more 30-inch step at quick time
and step off with the trailing foot, double timing as previously described.


31

d. To resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time, the command
SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On
the command sides and resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time.
e. When the individual is marking time and he receives the command,

TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution may be given as either foot
strikes the deck. To demonstrate, the command is given as the left foot strikes the
deck. On the command of execution, NA, his next step will be one more two-inch
vertical step in place with your right foot (Step). His next step will be a 36-inch step to
the front with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of
your left heel to the rear of your right heel. At the same time, increase the cadence to
180 steps per minute and raise the forearms to a horizontal position along the
waistline, fingers closed, knuckles out. He will continue to march, taking 180, 36-inch
steps per minute, swinging your arms in their natural arc across the front of your
body, until given another command.
f. When the individual is double timing in place and he receives the command,
TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution may be given as either foot
strikes the deck. For the purpose of demonstration, the command will be given as
the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, NA, his next step will be
one more six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (Step). His next step will
be a 36-inch step to the place with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are
measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear of your left heel to the rear of
your right heel. He will continue to march, taking 180, 36-inch steps per minute,
swinging his arms in their natural arc across the front of his body, until given another
command.
4. TO FACE IN MARCHING
a. FACE TO THE RIGHT as in Marching - Assume that the individual is

halted at attention and he receives the command, LIKO SA KANAN, NA. On the
preparatory command, LIKO SA KANAN, he shifts the weight of his body to the left
leg without noticeable movement. On the command of execution, NA, he faces 90
degrees to the right by pivoting on the ball of the left foot, at the same time taking a
30-inch step in the new direction with the right foot, swinging his arms in their natural
arc, six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, but does not
allow them to swing away from the body (Step). He will continue to march, taking
120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging his arms six inches to the front and three
inches to the rear of his legs, until given another command.
b. FACE TO THE LEFT as in Marching – Assume that the individual is

halted at attention and he receives the command, LIKO SA KALIWA, NA. On the
preparatory command, he shifts the weight of his body to the right leg without
noticeable movement. On the command of execution, NA, he faces 90 degrees to
the left by pivoting on the ball of the right foot, at the same time taking a 30-inch step
in the new direction with the left foot, swinging his arms in their natural arc, six
inches to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, but does not allow them
to swing away from the body (Step). He will continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch
steps per minute, swinging his arms six inches to the front and three inches to the
rear of your legs, until given another command.


32
5. TO MARCH BY THE FLANK
Being in march, the commands are KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, NA. At

the command NA, given as the right (or left) foot strikes the ground, advance and
plant your left (or right foot) align the trailing foot to his advanced foot, then face to
the right (or left) in marching and step off in the new direction on his left foot.
6. TO MARCH TO THE REAR
WHILE MARCHING FORWARD AT QUICK TIME – Assume that the

individual is marching forward at quick time and he receives the command,
PABALIK, NA. The command of execution will be given as the right foot strikes the
deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution, NA,
his next step will be to place your left foot approximately 30 inches and directly in
front of his right foot (Step). His next step will be to face 180 degrees to the right
about by pivoting on the balls of both feet (Step). The legs remain straight without
stiffness and the arms should be clipped to the sides until the 1st step is made. After
which the arm continue to naturally swing, but does not allow to swing wide from the
body. His next step, without loss of cadence will be a 30-inch step in the new
direction (Step). He will continue to march at quick time, until given another
command.
7. EYES RIGHT/LEFT WHILE MARCHING
While marching at quick time, the unit leader will command HANDA,
KANANG, TINGIN when he is twelve (12) paces from the reviewing officer. The
command of execution will be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this is a
movement to the right.
On the command of execution TINGIN, and for the count of one, the
individual’s next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with his left foot. At the same
time, all files, except the right file, will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to
the right (Step). The shoulders remain square to the front. The members of the right
file will keep their head and eyes to the front. They will continue to march until given
the next command.


33

EYES RIGHT/ KANANG TINGIN

while marching
The command to terminate this movement is HANDA, RAP. The command of

execution is given when the last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer and it
is given as the left foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On
the command of execution RAP, his next step is a 30-inch to the front with your right
foot. At the same time, all men who have executed eyes right will turn their head and
eyes to the front (Step). They will continue to march until given another command.
Eyes Left: The movement of eyes left may only be executed while marching
and is normally done during street parades, when the reviewing stand is on the left.
While marching at quick time, the unit leader will give the command when he is
twelve (12) paces from the reviewing officer. The command of execution is given as
the left foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On the
command of execution, TINGIN and for the count of one, his next step will be a 30-
inch step to the front with his right foot. At the same time, all files, except the left file,
will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the left (step). The shoulders
remain square to the front. The members of the left file will keep their head and eyes
to the front. They will continue to march until given the next command. The
command to terminate this movement is: HANDA, RAP. The command of execution
is given when the last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer, and is given as
the right foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the
command of execution, RAP, the next step is a 30-inch step to the front with the left
foot. At the same time, all files which have had executed eyes left will smartly turn


34
their head and eyes to the front (Step). They will continue to march until given
another command.
8. STAFF BEHIND ME
To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is

KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO, KAD. The movement is executed in 11 counts for
a 2 or 3-man staff, 16 counts for a 5-man staff and 21 counts for an 8-man staff. At
the command KAD, all members of the staff execute right face, and then the first
man faces to the left and marches 4 steps, column left and halts on the prescribed
last count. All other members march forward and follow the first man turning at the
same pivot made by the first man. All the members halt in the designated count and
faces left altogether automatically now facing the new direction.

STAFF BEHIND ME
commander with 3-man staff


35
CHAPTER IV
INDIVIDUAL
MOVEMENTS
WITH ARMS
*The following chapters focus on Drills and Ceremonies movements, nevertheless Uniforms to be used in Drills and
Ceremonies shall be in accordance with the latest approved standard as prescribed by the BFP-NHQ Uniform Committee.

CHAPTER IV- INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITH ARMS

36
SECTION A
MANUAL FOR SWORD
The sword is worn by officers, cadet officers, officer candidates and student
officers while participating in ceremonies with troops with drill arms, or as directed. It
is carried on the left side of the body attached to a sword strap. Command of
execution for sword drill is KALIS (i.e. TANGHAL KALIS) while for the troops with
arms is TA (i.e. TANGHAL, TA).
1. GENERAL RULES
a. The sword shall be drawn with armed troops or in command of a unit.
b. Carry sword is assumed when:
i. Giving commands to include preparatory commands;

ii. Changing position in formation at quick time;
iii.Addressing or being addressed by a senior;
iv. Marching at quick time;
v. Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except Parade;
and
vi. Rest, At Ease, Present Arms, Order Arms, or Eyes Right (Left).
c. Present sword is assumed when:
i. Saluting with the sword;

ii. The unit is presented to the Colors or to any person, or when the
National Anthem, To the Color or Retreat is played; and
iii. Executing Eyes Right (Left) when marching past a reviewing officer
or stand. In the interior of a formation, remain at carry position.
d. While marching with the sword at the carry position, the arms should
swing naturally. Do not hold the scabbard or sling.
e. While marching at double time, hold the sword diagonally across the
chest. Hold the scabbard with the left hand just below the frog stud.
f. The sword must always be worn correctly attached to a white sword strap
with the breastplate and the strap fastened by a white belt or sash.

2. DRAW SWORD
a. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY, tap/grasp the scabbard,

BUNOT, a quick two-count movement, rotate scabbard 180 degrees parallel to the
ground. At the same time, grasp the grip of the sword with the right hand and pull the
sword about 10 inches from the scabbard, then pull back with the right forearm now
be roughly parallel to the ground with the left hand still holding the scabbard against
the side.


37
ANTABAY BUNOT
front and side view front and side view

b. On the command of execution KALIS, a quick three-count movement, draw
the sword smartly out of the scabbard and raise the right arm to its full extent,
directly to the front, blade at an angle of 45 degrees, sword in a straight line with
arm. Then put the tip of the sword against the shoulder seam, and smartly clip arms
with blade vertical, releasing the left hand from the scabbard with the last count.
KALIS
three-count movement


38
3. CARRY SWORD
At the position of carry sword, the sword is held by the right hand, the blade
vertical, the right arm nearly extended, the thumb and forefinger embracing the lower
part of the grip, thumb along the trouser, with fingers joined holding the grip. The
front of the blade rests inside the point of the shoulder and not along the arm.
CARRY SWORD
front and side view
4. PRESENT SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD/CARRY SWORD
a. Executed only when halted at Order or Carry Sword.
b. On the command TANGHAL, TA raise the right hand smartly to the level of
your neck about a fist away from your chin, keep the thumb on the left side of the
grip, wrist straight, elbow against the body and the blade of the sword inclined at a
30 degree angle. Vertically lower the sword seeing to it that the blade is parallel to
your body, then lower the point down smartly to a position about 3 inches above the
ground. Straighten the right arm while the thumb remains on the left side of the grip.
The tip of the sword should be held directly forward.


39
PRESENT SWORD
first count movement
front and side view
PRESENT SWORD
second count movement
front and side view


40
5. ORDER SWORD FROM PRESENT SWORD
a. The command is BABA, TA. This is a one-count movement.

b. On the command of execution, TA, turn the true edge down. In this
position, the right arm hangs naturally, thumb along the trouser seam. The blade is
inclined down and forward, with the tip 3 inches above the ground.
ORDER SWORD
front and side view
6. CARRY SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD
a. The command is HANDA DALA, KALIS.
b. On the preparatory command HANDA DALA, twist the sword counter

clockwise letting the flat side of the sword face front.
c. At the command of execution KALIS, bring up the sword to the position of

Carry Sword using the action of your fingers only.


41
7. TAAS KANANG KAMAY FROM CARRY SWORD
a. From Carry Sword position, the command is TAAS KANANG KAMAY,

NA.
b. On the preparatory command TAAS KANANG KAMAY, (two-count

movement) hold the sword with both hands at the center of your body and
perpendicular to the ground, and then bring the sword to the left in Carry Sword
position.
TAAS KANANG KAMAY TAAS KANANG KAMAY

first count preparatory movement second count preparatory movement
front and side view
c. On the command of execution NA, raise the right hand smartly to the
position of Panunumpa.


42
TAAS KANANG KAMAY
d. To return to Carry Sword, the command is BABA KAMAY, NA. On the

command of execution NA, which is a four-count movement, (1) smartly bring the
right hand down; (2) hold the sword with both hands at the center of your body and
perpendicular to the ground; (3) bring the sword to the right with left hand on the
level of right shoulder; and (4) smartly bring the left hand down, going back to Carry
Sword position.
BABA KAMAY, NA
third count movement


43
8. REST WITH THE SWORD
a. Parade Rest

i. Executed normally from Order Sword. If executed from Carry Sword
execute Order Sword first before going to Parade Rest.
ii. If executed from Order Sword, it is a one-count movement. The

command is TIKAS, NGA. On the command of execution, NGA, move the left
foot and left arm as executed in Parade Rest.
PARADE REST
front and rear view
iii. On the command of execution, DA, assume the position of Attention,

at the position of Order Sword.
iv. If executed from Carry Sword, it will be a two-count movement. On

the command of execution NGA, the first count shall be to execute Order
Sword followed by the execution of Parade Rest.


44
b. Rest and At Ease
i. The command PALUWAG is given only from the position of Parade

Rest.
ii. At the command of execution, PALUWAG, the tip of the sword is

brought to the left side horizontal to the ground and is simultaneously received
by the left hand. Both the right hand and left hand are fully extended at this
position. The shoulder may move, however, the officer must remain standing
and silent with his right foot in place.
REST and AT EASE
iii. Rest may be executed from At Ease. At the command PAHINGA,

the officer may move and talk but his right foot should remain in place.
iv. On the preparatory command, PULUTONG (BALANGAY), resume

the position of Parade Rest. On the command of execution, DA, assume the
position of Attention, at Order Sword.
8. RETURN SWORD
a. The command is ANTABAY SALONG, KALIS, SAKSAK, BABA.
b. It is executed from carry sword.


45
c. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY

SALONG, raise the right hand to a position a fist
away from and in front of and on line with your left
shoulder. The blade of the sword must be
perpendicular to the ground.
ANTABAY SALONG
d. At the command of execution,

KALIS, the sword is rotated 270 degrees
counter-clockwise towards the front then
fully extending the right hand towards the
front.
KALIS


46
e. At the command SAKSAK, sheathe the sword to a point only where the
right forearm holding the sword is parallel to the ground and the left hand holding the
scabbard toward the side.
SAKSAK
front and side view
f. At the command BABA, push the sword smartly down on, and release the
grip of the sword with the right hand so that it pulls and slides all the way down into
scabbard. In the same position, return the right hand to the right side. Release the
scabbard with the left hand and return it to the left side, assuming the position of
Attention.
9. INSPECTION ARMS
a. The command is SIYASAT KALIS.
b. When an inspecting officer approaches an element/officer for inspection,

the first execution is Carry Sword.
c. From Carry Sword raise your right hand smartly to bring the sword to the
right side, keeping your right upper arm as close as possible to the body, holding the
sword parallel with the ground with the guard of the sword in front and in line with the
shoulder, simultaneously move the left foot forward.


47
INSPECTION ARMS
front and side view
d. Stand in Attention while

the inspection officer inspects the
sword.
e. After the inspection, the

manner of receiving back the
sword is shown below. Once
received, smartly bring the sword
to the position of Carry Sword.


48
RECEIVING SWORD AFTER INSPECTION
10. EYES RIGHT WHILE MARCHING
a. The command HANDA, KANANG, TINGIN is executed while marching at

Carry Sword.

MARCHING AT CARRY
SWORD


49
b. The command HANDA is given as the right foot strikes the marching
surface (no action is taken). The second time the right foot strikes the marching
surface, the command KANANG, is given (no action is taken).
c. As the right foot strikes the surface the third time the command of execution
TINGIN is given, perform Present Arms.
d. As the right foot strikes the ground, pull

the right hand back as in swinging of arms and
simultaneously turn the head sharply to the right
at a 45-degree angle.
MARCHING AT PRESENT SWORD

first count movement of Present Sword
e. While marching at eyes right, the

right arm is swung naturally 6 inches to the
front and 3 inches to the rear from the seam in
a vertical plane flexing the wrist to keep the tip
of the blade level above the marching surface.
This requires extending the wrist forward and
elevating the wrist rearward.
EYES RIGHT WHILE MARCHING

AT PRESENT SWORD
second count movement of Present Sword


50
f. The command HANDA, RAP is executed as follows:
i. The command HANDA is given as the right foot strikes the marching
surface (no action is taken);
ii. The second time the right foot strikes the marching surface the
command, RAP is given (still no action is taken).
iii. As the left foot strikes the ground the sword is turned to the Order
Sword position while maintaining the arm swing and simultaneously turning
the head sharply to the front.
MARCHING AT ORDER SWORD

as described in para f.iii
(in preparation of Carry Sword)
iv. And finally, as your right foot strikes the ground, return the sword to
the Carry Sword position.
11. PORT ARMS
a. Port Arms is executed on the preparatory command SIGLANG HAKBANG,

on the command SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD.
b. This position is assumed only from the position of Carry Sword.
c. The right arm swings naturally across and 6 inches in front of the body.
d. The sword is centered 45 degrees vertically with the ground pointed to the
left. The left hand grasps the scabbard.


51
SECTION B
MANUAL OF GUIDON
Guidon is a small flag or streamer carried by a qualified BFP Junior Non
Commissioned Officer (NCO) called the Guidon Bearer. Guidons are used as a
guide, marking, or identification of a certain unit or company.
1. ORDER GUIDON
a. At Order Guidon (position of attention), keep the ferrule on the marching

surface and touching the outside of the right foot, close to the little toe.
b. Hold the staff in the right hand in the “v” formed by the fingers (extended
and joined pointing downward) and thumb. Keep the right hand and arm behind the
staff.
c. Rest the staff against the hollow of the shoulder.
NOTE: To Face with the guidon, raise the ferrule

one inch off the marching surface by bending the
right elbow slightly. After executing the
movement, automatically lower the ferrule to
the order position. Keep the staff vertical
throughout the movement.
Execute Facing Movements, Marching Moveme

nts, Present Arms (Present Guidon), and Rest
Movements with the unit. During manual of arms
movements, remain at Order Guidon EXCEPT
for Present Arms.


52
2. PARADE REST, STAND AT EASE, and AT EASE

(picture on the left)
a. On the preparatory command TIKAS, move

the right hand up the staff until the forearm is horizontal
and grasp the staff.
b. On the command of execution NGA, thrust

the staff straight forward keeping the ferrule on the
marching surface until the arm is fully extended, and at
the same time, execute parade rest as in individual
drill.
c. Stand At Ease is the same as Parade

Rest, except that the eyes and head are turned toward
the commander.
d. Execute At Ease and Rest with the guidon

from the Order Guidon position.
3. CARRY GUIDON (picture on the right)
a. On the preparatory command

for Marching Movements, execute Carry Guidon from Order
Guidon by grasping the staff with the right hand and raising
it vertically six inches off the marching surface.
b. At the same time, reach across the body (forearm

horizontal) and grasp the staff with the left hand.
c. Hold the staff in position with the left hand while

sliding the right hand down six inches, regrasping the staff.
d. On the command of execution KAD, return the left

hand smartly to the left side and simultaneously step off.
e. To resume Order Guidon from Carry Guidon, let

the staff slide through the right hand until the ferrule touches
the marching surface.


53
4. DOUBLE TIME WITH THE GUIDON
a. On the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG bring the staff across

the body with the spearhead to the left.
b. The right hand grasps the same spot as at carry.
c. The right forearm is level with the deck and the elbow against the body.
d. Grip the staff with the left hand in front of the point where the neck and
shoulder join.
e. The flat side of the spearhead should face front


54
5. RAISED GUIDON
a. On the preparatory commands TANGHAL and TINGIN SA KANAN/

HANDA KANANG TINGIN, raise the guidon vertically by grasping the staff with the
right hand.
b. Raise the guidon with the right hand while simultaneously moving the left
hand across the body to guide the guidon (with palm to the rear).
c. Keep raising the guidon until the right hand is on line with the right
shoulder.
d. Keep the right elbow into the side. Hold the guidon in this position until the
command of execution is given


55
6. PRESENT GUIDON
a. On the preparatory
command of Present Arms and
Eyes Right, execute Raised
Guidon.
b. On the command of
execution, lower the guidon to
the front using the right hand,
keeping the left hand in the same
position as raised guidon until the
guidon is in the horizontal
position resting under the armpit.
c. As soon as the staff is horizontal, return

the left hand sharply to the left side
d. During a review, execute Eyes Right as

the guidon is presented on the command of
execution. Move the head and eyes to the front as
the guidon is raised on the preparatory
command HANDA of HANDA, RAP.
e. On the command of Order Arms or Ready

of Ready Front, regrasp the staff with the left hand
at its original position and execute Raised Guidon.
On the command of execution TA or RAP, lower
the guidon back to Carry or Order Position.


56
7. GUIDON BEARER’S SALUTE
a. When the guidon bearer (not in formation) has to salute from

the Order or Carry position, the Salute is given with the left hand.
b. Move the left hand sharply to a position so that the first joint of the
forefinger is touching the staff. The fingers and thumb are extended and joined, palm
down, wrist straight, and forearm horizontal.
c. After the salute is acknowledged, return the left hand sharply to the side.
d. When at double time (not in formation), return to quick time, returning the
guidon to the carry position and render the guidon salute as previously described.
Upon completing the salute return to the carry position and resume double time
Guidon Bearer’s Salute


57

CHAPTER V
SQUAD DRILL

CHAPTER V- SQUAD DRILL

58

SECTION A
FORMATIONS
1. SQUAD
Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed (as previously
prescribed) while performing as squad member/s.
The squad has four prescribed formations, the line, the column, the abreast and
the file (see illustrations).
When the squad is in line, squad members are numbered from the left; when in
column, from front to rear.
The squad normally marches in column, but for short distances only, it may
march in line.
When the squad drills as a separate unit, the squad leader carries his weapon at
sling arms. When the squad is in line formation, the squad leader assumes a post three
steps in front of and centered on a squad; when in a column or columns of twos, three
steps to the left and centered on the squad.
If the squad is a part of a larger unit (which is a platoon), the first squad leader
shall take his post on the left side of the platoon sergeant/guide, the second squad
leader shall cover the first squad leader in the same manner as the third squad leader
covers the second squad leader. The squad elements, in line formation, shall take their
posts to the left of their respective squad leaders.
2. FORMING THE SQUAD
a. The squad normally forms in line formation; however, it may reform in column
when each member can identify his exact position in the formation. When there are one
(1) to three (3) elements, it is usually formed as one line. On the other hand, four (4) to
nine (9) elements form two (2) columns; ten (10) to nineteen (19) elements form three
(3) columns; and twenty (20) and more number of elements make four (4) columns.
i. To form a normal interval, the squad leader commands HUMANAY.

Coming to position of attention and giving of command TILAP HUMANAY occur
simultaneously.
(1) Elements proceed to their respective positions in double time.
(2) The right flank man positions himself so that when the squad is
formed, it is three steps in front of and centered on the squad leader.
(3) The right flank man comes to the position of attention and
raises his left arm laterally at shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and
thumb extended and joined, palm facing down. He must ensure that the
left arm is in line with his body.
(4) The man nearer the left of the right flank man comes to the
position of Attention, turns his head and eyes to the right, and raises his
left arm in the same manner as the right flank man. He obtains proper
alignment by taking short steps forward or backward until he is in line with


59

the right flank man. He obtains exact internal position by taking short
steps to the left or right until his shoulder touches the extended
fingertips of the right flank man. As soon as the man to the left obtains
normal interval, each man individually lowers his arm to his side,
sharply turns his head and eyes to the front and assumes the position
of attention.
(5) The right flank man then sharply turns to the position of
attention manner except the left flank man who does not raise his left
arm.
(6) All other members of the squad shall form in the same
ii. To form at close interval, the formation is completed in the manner
prescribed for normal interval, except that the command is MASINSING
PAGITAN, HUMANAY. The squad member obtains close interval by placing
the palm of his left hand on the left hip, positioned even with the waist, fingers
and thumb joined and extended downward, with the elbow in line with the
body and touching the arm of the man to the left.
iii. To form in column, the squad leader faces the proposed flank of the
column and commands SUNURAN, HUMANAY. On the command of
execution HUMANAY, squad members double time to their original positions
in formation and cover the man to their front.
SQUAD FORMATION
elements in line elements in line
elements in column elements in column


60

3. COUNTING OFF
a. The squad may count off in line or column formation. The command is
ISAHANG BILANG, NA.
b. When the squad is in a line formation, the counting is executed from right to
left. The command shall be ISAHANG BILANG, NA. On the preparatory command,
each member, except the right flank man, turn their head 45 degrees to the right. At
the command of execution NA, the right flank man counts off “ISA”, followed by the
second man counting off his number “DALAWA”. The second man shall
simultaneously turn his head to the front. All the other members shall execute count
off consecutively in the same manner until the entire squad has counted off. The last
man will shout “HULING BILANG NA PO” after counting off.
c. When the squad is in column formation, the counting is executed from front
to rear. On the command of execution NA, the element at the head of column turns
his head and eyes to the right and counts over his shoulder, "ISA". After counting off
his number, he immediately comes to the position of attention. All other members
count their numbers in sequence in the same manner as the number one man; the
last man in the file does not turn his head and eyes to the right.
4. CHANGING INTERVAL WHILE IN LINE

NOTE: To ensure that each member understands the number of steps to be taken,
the squad leader shall command, ISAHANG BILANG, NA before giving any
command that may cause the squad to change interval. Members do not raise their
arms when changing interval.
a. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the command is MASINSING
PAGITAN, TUNTON KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank
man stands fast. Everybody should place palm on hips, fingers joined and pointing
downward, with elbow aligned with the body. All men except the number one man
turn their head 45 degrees to the right and simultaneously execute right side step in
a brisk manner. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader commands
HANDA, RAP.
NOTE: The
squad leader
takes the
correct number
of steps to
maintain his
position of
three steps in
front of and
centered on
the squad.


61

b. To obtain normal interval from close interval, the command is TUNTON
KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man stands fast.
Everybody should extend left arm, fingers joined and palms facing downward. All
men to the left of the number one man turn their heads 45 degrees to the right and
simultaneously execute left side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements are
aligned, the squad leader commands HANDA, RAP.
c. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the command is IBAYONG

DALANG MULA SA KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank
man stands fast and raises his left arm. All men to the left of the number one man
turn their heads 45 degrees to the right, simultaneously raising both arms. The last
man extends his right arm only. Everybody except the right flank man executes left
side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader
commands HANDA, RAP.


62

d. To obtain normal interval from double interval, the command is TUNTON
KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man stands fast and
raises his left arm. All men to the left of the number one man turn their head 45
degrees to the right, simultaneously raising their left arms except for the last man,
then execute right side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements are aligned, the
squad leader commands HANDA, RAP.
5. ALIGNING THE SQUAD
NOTE: The squad leader commands the squad the appropriate interval prior
to the giving of the command for alignment.
a. To align the squad at a normal interval, the commands are TUNTON

KANAN, NA, and HANDA, RAP. On the command of execution NA, the right flank
man stands fast and raises his left arm laterally at shoulder level. Simultaneously,
other elements to the left of the right flank man extend their left arms laterally at
shoulder level, elbows locked, fingers and thumbs extended and joined, palms facing
down. Likewise, they will turn their heads 45 degrees to the right and align, ensuring
that their left arm is aligned with their body. They align themselves by short steps
right or left and forward or backward until their right shoulders touch the fingertip of
the man on their right. On the command of execution RAP, each member returns
sharply to the position of attention.
NOTE: If the squad leader wants exact alignment, on the command of execution NA,
he faces to the half left marching and marches by the most direct route to a position
on line with the squad, halts one step from the right flank man, and faces down the
line. From his position he verifies the alignment of the squad, directing the men to
move forward or backward, as necessary, calling them by name or number: "Fire
Cadet Palermo, move forward two inches; Number eight move backward four
inches". The squad leader remains at attention, taking short steps to the right or left
as necessary to see the squad. Having aligned the squad, he centers himself on the
right flank man by taking short steps to the left or right. Perpendicular to the


63

formation, he faces to the left, and commands HANDA, RAP. These procedures also
apply when aligning the squad at close or double interval.
b. To align the squad at close interval, the commands are MASINSING

PAGITAN, TUNTON KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. The movement is executed in
the same manner prescribed for alignment at normal interval except that the squad
members obtain close interval.
c. To align the squad at double interval, the commands are, IBAYONG

DALANG MULA SA KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. On the command of execution
NA, each member (except the right flank man) turns his head to the right and aligns
himself with the man on his right. At the same time, each member (except the right
and left flank men) extends both arms and positions himself by short steps right or
left until his fingertips are touching the fingertips of the members on his right and left.
(The right flank man raises his left arm; the left flank man raises his right arm.)
d. To align the squad in column, the command is TUNTON HARAP, NA. On
the command NA, each member (except the number one man) raises his left arm
forward to a horizontal position, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and
joined, palm facing down, and obtains an arm's length plus about six inches (from
the fingertips) to the back of the man to his front. At the same time, each man aligns
himself directly behind the man to his front. To resume the Position of Attention, the
command HANDA, RAP is given. On this command, each member sharply returns
to the position of attention.
SECTION B
SQUAD MOVEMENTS
1. MARCHING THE SQUAD
a. For short distances only, the squad may march forward while in line
formation.
b. When marching long distances, the squad is marched in column.
c. To form a column formation from a line formation, the command is

HARAP SA KANAN, RAP.
d. When a column formation is originated from a line formation at close

interval, the squad may march for the short distances at half step less than the
correct distance. To obtain correct distance while marching, the command is LAKAD
PADALANG, NA. On the command of execution NA, the number one man takes
one more 15- inch step and then steps off with a 30-inch step. Each squad member
begins marching with a 30-inch step at an approximate point where the number one
man steps off, or as soon as correct distance has been obtained.


64

2. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN
a. From the halt, the command to start the squad in motion and
simultaneously change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees is
PASULONG LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD or PASULONG LIKO HATING
KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. As the command of execution KAD is given, the lead man
faces in the commanded direction and steps off, marching. All other members march
forward and pivot on the ball of the lead foot in the commanded direction and step off
trailing foot. As the members approach the pivot point, they shorten or lengthen their
steps as necessary to pivot at the approximate point that the lead man pivoted. The
elements then perform the 21-knee high (this count may be altered depending on the
size of the squad), this is done by performing Mark Time March while slightly moving
forwards towards the commanded direction, to maintain distance with other
members of the squad; this movement shall end when all elements have passed the
pivot point established by the lead man.
b. To change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees when marching,

the preparatory command LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), NA or LIKO HATING
KANAN (HATING KALIWA), NA is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes
the marching surface. The command of execution NA is given the next time the foot
in the desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution
NA, the lead man takes one additional step, pivots in the commanded direction as
the pivot foot strikes the marching surface, and continues to march in the new
direction. Other members continue to march forward and execute the pivot as
prescribed from the halt.
c. To march in the opposite direction, the command is PABALIK, NA. The

preparatory command PABALIK is given as the right foot strikes the marching
surface. The command of execution NA is given the next time the right foot strikes
the marching surface. On the command of execution, all members take one more
step with their left foot, pivot on the balls of both feet, turn 180 degrees to the right,
and step off in the new direction. The arms are not allowed to swing outward while
turning.
d. To avoid an obstacle in the line of march, the squad leader directs,
PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA), NA. The lead man inclines around the obstacle
and resumes the original direction. All other members follow the lead man.
3. MARCHING TO THE FLANK
a. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distance only) when
marching in column.
b. The command for this movement is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, KAD.
The preparatory command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the
marching surface, and the command of execution is given the next time the foot in
the desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution
KAD, all members take one more step, pivot 90 degrees in the commanded direction
on the ball of the lead foot, and step off in the new direction with the trailing foot. As
the members begin to march in the new direction, they glance to the right.


65

4. FORMING COLUMNS OF TWOS AND REFORMING
a. Forming columns of twos from a file is executed only from the halt. The
command is DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the
preparatory command, the lead team leader commands MANATILI. The trailing
team leader commands LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On the command of
execution KAD, the trailing team leader executes a LIKO HATING KANAN
(KALIWA), inclines to the left or right when the correct interval is obtained, and
commands PATAKDA, NA and PANGKAT, TO so as to halt abreast of lead team
leader.
b. Forming a file from columns of twos is executed only from halt. The
command is HARAP SA KANAN and SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA. On the
command execution RAP, both teams face right. On the preparatory command
SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA, the lead team leader commands PASULONG. The
trailing team leader commands MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the
lead team marches forward. The trailing team leader commands LIKO HATING
KALIWA, KAD. The team then marches in half step. When the last man of the lead
team is abreast of the team leader, he commands LIKO HATING KANAN, KAD. His
team then follows the lead team at the correct distance.
5. RESTING THE SQUAD
a. The squad member in formation executes the rest formation.
b. When the situation warrants a greater degree of relaxation than the rest
position, the squad leader may command TIWALAG. Squad members may leave
their position in formation, but they must remain in immediate areas. The command
TIWALAG will not be used to terminate a formation.
6. DISMISSING THE SQUAD
a. The squad is dismissed with the members at attention.
b. With armed troops, the commands are SIYASAT, TA, AGAP, TA; IBABA
(ISAKBAT), TA; and LUMANSAG.
c. With unarmed troops, the command is LUMANSAG.
d. Unless otherwise stated (by the person in charge in his instructions prior to
the command LUMANSAG), the command LUMANSAG terminates only the
formation not the duty of the day.


67
CHAPTER VI
PLATOON DRILL

CHAPTER VI- PLATOON DRILL

68
SECTION A
FORMATIONS
1. GENERAL RULES
a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed while
performing as a squad member during the conduct of platoon drill.
b. Platoon drill, for the most part, merely provides the procedures for
executing drill movements in conjunction with other squads formed in the same
formation.
c. The platoon has two prescribed formations: the platoon formation with
squads in line and squads in column.
d. When in a line formation, the elements (squads) of a platoon are

numbered from front to rear; in column formation, from left to right.
e. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in a line formation, the post
for the platoon leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon. When in a
column (mass) formation, the platoon leader is at the center between second and
third squad leader on the platoon.


69
f. When the platoon leader commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD;

PAURONG HAKBANG PAKALIWA (PAKANAN), KAD; PASULONG, KAD or
causes the platoon to change interval, he moves at the same time (with the
appropriate step) so as to maintain proper position.
g. When the platoon drills as part of a larger unit in line formation, the post
for the platoon leader is six steps in front and centered the platoon. The platoon
sergeant position himself as base in the right flank in line formation.
h. The squad leader of the first squad serves as the base when the platoon
is in a line formation. The leader of the fourth squad serves as the base when the
platoon is in column formation.
NOTE: SQUARE THE PLATOON. When the files (columns) are uneven, the
platoon sergeant normally directs the men in longer files to move to another file to
balance the formation; or he may fill the vacancy himself as the last man in the right
file.
2. FORMING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon normally forms in a line formation, however, it may reform in a

column when each man can identify his exact position in the formation.
b. The platoon forms basically the same as a squad. The platoon leader
assumes the position of attention and commands HUMANAY (At PASINSING
PAGITAN, HUMANAY or in SUNURAN, HUMANAY). On the command HUMANAY
(At MASINSIN, HUMANAY), the squad leader and the first squad (when formed) is
three steps in front of and centered on the platoon. Other squad leaders cover on the
first squad leader at the correct distance, which is obtained by estimation. The
members of the first squad fall in on their squad leader as prescribed for squad drill.
Members of the other squads fall in on their squad leader assume the position of
attention and turn their heads and eyes to the right,they obtain correct distance by
taking short steps forward or backward and align themselves on the man to their
right. They then sharply turn their heads and eyes to the front as in the position of
attention and obtain proper interval by taking short steps left and right to cover on the
man to the front. Members of all squads, other than the first squad, will not raise their
left arms unless the man to their immediate left has no one to his front in formation
on which to cover.
c. When armed, members fall in at order arms. For safety, the commands
SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA are given at the initial formation of
the day and just before the last command, LUMANSAG.
d. When a report is appropriate, the platoon leader commands MAG ULAT.

The squad leaders, in succession from front to rear, turn their heads and
eyes toward the platoon sergeant and salute (holding the salute until returned) and
report for example:
i. Situation 1. When all squad members are in formation, the report is

“NARITO PO LAHAT”.


70
ii. Situation 2. When squad members are absent, the fire officers and
reasons for absence are reported:
Fire Officer Qiloqilo – Sick Call
Fire Officer Dowasko - Sick call
Fire Officer Taning – AWOL
e. After receiving the reports from the squad leaders, the platoon seargeant
faces about and awaits the arrival of the platoon leader. When the platoon leader
has halted at his post, the squad leader salutes and reports, “Pinuno, narito pong
lahat”; or “Pinuno, liban sa ____ narito po ang lahat napagalaman”. The platoon
leader returns the salute, after which the platoon sergeant faces about and march
directly his post, and faces about.
f. If the platoon leader is not present for the formation, the platoon sergeant
steps forward three steps (after receiving the squad leader’s report) and assumes
the duties of the platoon leader.
g. When appropriate, the platoon may be formed by the platoon leader rather
than by the platoon sergeant. The procedures are the same as previously described
except that the first squad forms six steps in front of and centered on the platoon
leader, and the platoon sergeant forms at his post.
3. BREAKING RANKS
a. When the situation requires one or more individuals to leave the formation
or to receive specific instructions from the platoon leader, the platoon
leader directs: ”Fire Officer Bawing (pause), Fire Officer Bumatay.”
b. When the individual’s name is called, he assumes the position of attention

and replies “NARITO PO”. He then takes one (15-inch) step backward, halts, faces
to the right (left) in marching, and exits the formation by marching to the nearest
flank. Once the individual has cleared the formation, he begins to double time and
halts two steps from and centered on the platoon leader.
4. COUNTING OFF
a. The platoon counts off in the same manner as the squad.
b. When in a line formation, the squads count in unison from right to left, each
squad leader sounds off, “ISA”.
c. When in a column formation, the men abreast of each other count in

unison from front to rear, each squad leader sounds off, “ISA”.
5. CHANGING INTERVAL
a. The platoon changes interval in a line formation in the same manner as the
squad.
b. To change interval when the platoon in a column at the halt, the right file
stands fast and serves at the base. All other members (abreast of each other)


71
execute the movement as previously prescribed. To obtain close interval from

normal interval, the third squad takes one right step, the second squad takes two
right steps, and the first squad takes three right steps. To obtain normal interval, the
procedures are the same except that the squads execute the same number of left
steps.
6. ALIGNING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon is aligned similar to the squad.
b. On the command of execution NA, the first squad leader stands fast and
serves as the base. Other squad leaders obtain correct distance by estimation.The
members of the first squad execute in the same manner as in squad drill to obtain
exact interval. All other squads execute as the first squad, except that each squad
members raise the left arm only for unity, actually covering (glancing out the corner
of the left eye) on the man to the front.
c. If the platoon leader wants exact alignment, he faces to the half left (half
right) in marching and marches (on the command of execution NA) by the most
direct route to a position on line with the first squad, halts one step from the squad
leader or left flank man, and faces down the line. From this position he verifies the
alignment of the first squad, directing the men to move forward or backward as
necessary calling them by name or number “Estoesta, Forward two inches; Number
eight, Backward four inches”. The platoon leader remains at attention, taking short
steps to the right or left’s necessary, to see down the squad. Having aligned the first
squad, the platoon leader after centering himself on the first squad, faces to the left
(right) in marching taking 2 (3 if at open ranks) short steps to the next squad, halts
faces down the line and aligns the squad in the same manner. After the last squad is
aligned the platoon leader centers himself on the squad leader by taking short steps
left or right, faces to the right (left) in marching, returns to his position (centered on
the platoon), halts perpendicular to the formation, faces to the left(right) and
commands HANDA, RAP.
7. OPENING AND CLOSING RANK
a. PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD is executed from a line formation while at

the halt. It may be executed while at any of the prescribed intervals. The commands
for these movements are PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD and PASINSING
TALUDTOD, KAD.
b. On the command of execution KAD, the front rank takes 2 steps forward
the second rank takes one step forward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth
rank takes one step backward. If additional ranks are present, the fifth rank takes two
steps backward and the sixth rank takes three steps backward.
c. To close ranks, the command is PASINSING TALUDTUD, KAD. On the

command of execution KAD, the first rank stands fast, the second rank takes one
step forward, the third rank takes two steps forward, and the fourth takes 3 steps.
d. Finally, the platoon leader commands HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP then

TATLONG HAKBANG PASULONG, KAD and lastly, HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP.


72
8. RESTING THE PLATOON
The platoon rests in the same manner prescribed for the squad.
9. DISMISSING THE PLATOON
a. The procedures for dismissing the platoon are basically as prescribed for
the squad.
b. If the platoon sergeant so desires, the squads maybe released to the

control of the squad leaders. The platoon commands PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG
MGA TILAP and salutes are exchanged. The platoon sergeant is no longer part of
the formation.
NOTE: Without leaving their position, the squad leaders then command TIWALAG,
move to a position in the immediate area, and command HUMANAY. Then, they
carry out the previous instructions and/or give any instructions for actions before the
next duty formation.
SECTION B
MOVEMENTS
1. GENERAL RULES
a. The platoon marches in the same manner as the squad.
b. When marching in line, the first squad leader serves as the guide, and as
the platoon is marching in a column, the fourth squad leader serves as a guide.
c. When marching in line, each member of the squad (glancing out of the
corner of his right eye) maintains alignment on the man to his right. When marching
in column, each member of the first, second, and third squads maintains alignment
on his right.
2. EYES RIGHT
a. The platoon renders courtesy during ceremonies or when marching past

the Colors by executing eyes right. The commands for this movement are HANDA,
KANANG, TINGIN and HANDA, RAP.
b. At the halt, upon the approach of the reviewing officer, the platoon leader
will command, TINGIN SA KANAN, NA. All men in the platoon (on the command of
execution, NA), while keeping their shoulders parallel to the front, turn their heads
and eyes to the right at 45-degree angle. They focus on and follow the person
passing to the front until they are again looking in front, at which time their heads and
eyes remain fixed to the front. Only the platoon leader renders the hand salute.


73
c. When marching, the preparatory command HANDA, KANANG, TINGIN is

given as the right foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution
TINGIN is given as the next time the right foot strikes the marching surface. On the
command of execution TINGIN, all men, except the file, turn their heads and eyes to
the right and align themselves on the right file while continuing to march. Men in the
right file do not turn their heads and eyes but continue to look straight to the front
and maintain correct distance. Only the platoon leader salutes. To determine the
courtesy, the preparatory command HANDA is given as the right foot strikes the
marching surface, and the command of execution TINGIN is given the next time the
right foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution, the men turn
their heads and eyes sharply to the front and the platoon leader terminates the hand
salute.
3. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN
a. The platoon changes the direction of marching basically the same as the
squad.
b. During a column movement, the base element is the squad on the flank in
the direction of the turn.
c. To change the direction 90 degrees, the command is LIKO SA KANAN,

KAD or (LIKO SA KALIWA, KAD). On the command of execution KAD, the base
squad executes the movement as the squad in the drill except that the squad leader
takes one 30-inch step and then takes up the half step. The squad leader continues
marching with a half step until the other squad leaders are abreast. The other squad
leaders, while maintaining correct (offset) alignment (abreast) with the base squad
leader, take up the half step. When all squad leaders are abreast, they step off with
30- inch step without command. All other platoon members march forward on the
command of execution and execute the column movement at approximately the
same location as their squad leaders in the same manner.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and the platoon sergeant are marching at their
posts in column as part of a larger formation, they execute a column half right (left)
rather than a 90 degrees column movement. After executing the LIKO HATING
KANAN (HATING KALIWA), they continue marching in an arc, inclines as
necessary, and resume their correct positions. After sensing that the squad leaders
are abreast of each other, the platoon leader resumes the 30-inch step. At times, the
platoon may find it necessary to shorten or lengthen the step in order to maintain
correct distance from the unit to his front.
d. To change the direction 45 degrees, the command is LIKO HATING

KANAN (HATING KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon
executes the movement in the same manner as a 90-degree turn except that the
base squad leader as well as the other squad leaders executes a Column Half Right
(Left).
NOTE: When executing a column movement at double time, elements adjust the
length of their steps so that the interval and the distance are maintained through and
beyond the pivot foot.


74
e. The platoon marches in the opposite direction (PABALIK, KAD) and in the
same manner as the squad.
f. The platoon inclines in the same manner as the squad. The squad nearest
the direction of the turn serves as the base. To avoid an obstacle in the path of the
march, the platoon leader directs PAGAWING KALIWA (KANAN).
g. When space is limited and the platoon leader wants to march his unit in the
opposite direction (reverse), with the squad leaders at the head of their squads, he
commands PABALIK, KAD. On the command of execution KAD (at the halt), the
first squad marches forward three steps, executes a Column Right, marches across
the front of the platoon, and execute another Column Right just beyond the fourth
squad. The second squad steps forward one step, executes a Column Right,
marches forward, and executes another Column Right between the third and the
fourth squads. The third squad executes two short Column Lefts from the halt and
marches between the remainder of the third and second squad. The fourth squad
marches forward two steps executes a column left, marches across the front of the
platoon, and executes another Column Left between the first and second squads.
NOTE: When there are only three squads, the first squad takes two steps before
executing right.
h. As the third squad leader marches past the last man in the third squad, he
and his squad begin to march at the half step. After marching past the last man in
each file, all other squads incline to the right and left as necessary, obtain normal
interval on the third squad, and begin to march with the half step. When all squads
are abreast of each other, they begin marching with a 30-inch step without
command.
i. During the movement, the platoon leader marches alongside the first squad,
and the platoon sergeant marches one step to the rear and centered between the
second and third squads.
j. When marching, the preparatory SALISIHANG HANAY is given as the left

foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution KAD is given as the
left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the
platoon executes the movement basically the same as from the halt, except that the
squad takes one additional step to ensure that the pivot is in the correct position to
execute the movement.
NOTE: When the platoon leader is marching at their post as part of a larger
formation, the platoon leader takes three steps forward and executes a column right,
marches across the front of the platoon, executes another column right (just beyond
fourth squad), marches to his post in the most direct manner, takes up the half step,
and then steps off with a 30-inch step when the squad leaders come to line. The
platoon sergeant incline to the right, follows the third squad until the movement is
completed, and then resumes his post.
4. MARCHING TO THE FLANKS
The platoon marches to the flank in the same manner as the squad.


75
5. FORMING A FILE AND REFORMING
a. The platoon forms a single file, from the right, left or as designated, only
when the column is at halt. The commands are SUNOD-SUNURANG TUDLING
MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD.
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad

gives the supplementary command PASULONG. The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the lead squad marches forward.
The squad leader next to the lead element (or as designated) looks over the
shoulder nearest the moving element and commands LIKO HATING KALIWA the
second from the last man is in line with him. The squad leader gives the command of
execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface when
abreast of him. On the command of execution, the squad leader executes the LIKO
HATING KALIWA and follows the last man of the preceding squad at the correct
distance. Other members of the squad march forward and execute the same
movement as the squad leader. The remaining squad forms the file in the same
manner as the squad immediately behind the lead element.
c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement

simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
SUNOD-SUNURANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA
(KANAN), KAD. Following the platoon leader's preparatory command, the squad
leader of the lead element commands MANATILI. On the platoon leaders’ command
of execution KAD, the lead squad executes the column left (right). The other squad
leaders command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) at the appropriate time as stated in
sub-paragraph b. They give the command of execution KAD as the right foot strikes
the marching surface at the pivot (column left), or the first time the last man's right
foot strikes the marching surface after the pivot (column right). Although the
command is LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), the outside squads (fourth or first)
execute Column Half Left (Right).
d. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD.
e. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the base squad

commands MANATILI. All other squad leaders command LIKO HATING-KANAN
(KALIWA). On the platoon leader's command of execution KAD, the base squad
stands fast; all other squads execute the Column Right (Left) simultaneously. As the
moving squad leaders reach a point (line) that ensures correct interval on the
element to their left (right), they automatically incline to the left (right) and command
PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, HINTO so that their squads are abreast of the base
(other) squad as halted.
NOTE: To reform the platoon to its original column formation when file was formed
on the command in sequence APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD
or the command TIWALAG and HUMANAY must be given.


76
6. FORMING COLUMNS OF TWOS AND REFORMING
a. The platoon forms columns of twos from the right or left when in columns of
fours at the halt. The command is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD.
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad

gives the supplementary command PASULONG. The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the two lead squads march forward.
The squad leader (second or third) next to the lead element gives the command to
start both of the remaining squads in motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the
moving elements, the squad leader gives the preparatory command LIKO SA
KANAN (KALIWA) when the second from the last man is abreast of him; then gives
the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching
surface. On the platoon leaders’ command of execution, both the squad leaders
execute the Column Half Left (Right), incline to the right (left) without command, and
follow the last men of the preceding squads at the correct distance. (Do not close the
space if the files of the two leading squads are not even). Other members of the
remaining squads march forward and execute the same movements as their squad
leaders.
c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement

simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA
(KANAN), KAD. The squad leader of the lead squad commands LIKO SA KANAN
(KALIWA) instead of forward. The squad leader of the second (third) squad gives
the command MANATILI. On the platoon leaders’ command of execution KAD, the
lead squad executes Column Left (Right). The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the platoon leader's command of execution KAD, the lead squad
executes Column Left (Right). The other squad leader of the second (third looking
over the shoulder nearest the moving elements), gives the preparatory command
LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) when the second from the last man is abreast of him,
then gives the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes
the marching surface at the pivot (Column Left) or the first time the last man's foot
strikes the marching surface after the pivot (Column Right). Although the command
is LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), the outside squads (fourth or first) execute Column
Half Left (Right).
d. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the
preparatory command, the squad leaders of the base squad commands TULUYANG
LAKAD. The trailing squad leaders command LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA).
On the platoon leaders’ command of execution KAD, the base squad stands fast.
The trailing squad leaders execute slightly more than the Column Half Right (Left)
simultaneously. As the trailing squad leaders reach a point (line) that will ensure
correct interval on the element to their left (right), they automatically incline to the
right (left). The squad leader nearest the stationary squads (second or third)
commands PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, TO.


77
CHAPTER VII
COMPANY DRILL

CHAPTER VII- COMPANY DRILL

78
SECTION A
PROCEDURES AND PERSONNEL
1. GENERAL RULES
a. Individual drill movements, squad and platoon drills are executed (as previously
described) while conducting company drill.
b. For the most part, company drill provides the procedures for executing platoon drill
in conducting with other platoon in the same formation.
c. For drill purposes, a company consists of a two (2) to three platoons.
d. When in line or a mass formation, the right platoon serves as the base; when in a
column formation, the lead platoon serves as the base.
e. The highest ranking officer in the rank assumes the position of company
commander.
f. When the company commander directs the company to open or close ranks, align,
extend march, close on the leading platoon, or prepare for inspection, the movement are
executed on the command of the platoon leaders.
g. The members of a company break ranks in the same manner as in platoon drill
except that the individuals called from the formation reports on the company commander
rather on the platoon leader.
h. The company marches, rests, executes eyes right in the same manner as the
platoon.
i. The company has for prescribed formations: company in line with platoons in line,
company in column with platoons in column, company in column with platoons in line (used
primarily for ceremonies), and company mass formation. However, the company may be
formed into a column of twos in the same manner as the platoon.


79


80
Figure 12. Company formation (company

mass formation: company in mass,
platoons abreast, squads abreast, elements
in line)
2. POSTS FOR KEY PERSONNEL
a. Company Commander. When the company is in line formation or in a

column with the platoons in line, the post for the company commander is 12 steps
(from the front-rank troops) to the front and centered on the company. As part of a
larger unit, when the company is in column with platoons in column or when in a
mass formation, his post is six steps from the front rank of troops and centered on
the company. As a separate unit, when the company is in column with platoons in
column, his post is 12 steps from and centered of the left flank.
b. Guidon Bearer. The guidon bearer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the rear
and two 15-inch steps to the left of the company commander.
c. Executive Officer. The executive officer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the
rear and two 15 15-inch steps to the right of the company commander.


81
SECTION B
INSPECTIONS
1. GENERAL RULES
a. The company has one prescribed formation for inspecting personnel and
equipment in ranks - company in line with platoons in line. When inspecting crew-
served weapon and vehicles, the personnel are normally positioned to the rear of
the formation with the operator (gunner) standing by his vehicle (weapon).
b. The commander may conduct an in-quarters (barracks) inspection to
include personnel appearance, individual weapons, field equipment, displays,
maintenance and sanitary conditions.
c. When the field equipment is to be inspected, it should be displayed.

Additional equipment not shown or different models of the equipment should be
arranged on sanitary conditions.
2. IN RANKS INSPECTION (LINE FORMATIONS)
a. When the company is in line formation, the company commander directs

‘HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT’. On that directive, all platoon leaders face about.
and commands PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD.( upon the command of execution,
all the members of the first squad will make two steps forward, one step for the
second squad and one step backwards for the fourth line. The third line will remain
on its position. All the squads of the platoon will perform “MASISINSING PAGITAN,
TUNTON KANAN at the same time, immediately after the opening of ranks) the
platoon leaders then aligns his platoon.
b. After aligning their respective platoon,The platoon leaders take their

position one step on the right side of the platoon guide/ sergeant, Face left, then
commands “HANDA HARAP”. They will then proceed back to their position in front
of the platoon, (center and 6 paces away). And bring the platoons to PARADE
REST.
c. When the company is inspected by an officer of a higher command, on the

approach of the inspecting officer, the company commander commands
BALANGAY, HUMANDA. He then faces about, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo, “A”
Balangay, FSINSP GALPO namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat”. The first
to be inspected is the Company commander and his staff, then the inspecting officer
will proceed to the platoon leader and inspect him, then directs the platoon leader to
lead him through the inspection, the platoon leader halts directly in front of the
second man in the first squad and on line and at normal interval (close interval) to
the right of the Inspecting Officer.
NOTE; As soon as the platoon leader and inspecting officer have halted in front of
the first two men, the squad leaders of the squads not inspected, command TIKAS
PAHINGA. When moving from man to man during the inspection, the inspecting
officer and platoon leader simultaneously face to the right in marching, take two short
steps (one step if the company is at close interval) halt and face to the left. After the
company commander has inspected the last man in the front rank, the platoon leader
hesitates momentarily and allows the company commander to precede him as he


82
inspect the rear of each rank, the next squad leader commands his squad to
HUMANDA. As they begin to inspect the next rank, the squad leader of the 1st rank
inspected commands TIKAS PAHINGA. Normally when inspecting the rear of each
rank the company commander inspects the rear of the last man in each rank, he
turns and halts directly in front of the second man. The first sergeant march past
(behind) the company commander and assume their position to his left.
d. When the company commander has completed the inspection, the platoon
leader commands the platoon to PULUTONG HUMANDA and overtakes the
inspecting officer en route back to the front of the platoon. The platoon leader halts
facing to the front (six steps in front and centered on his platoon) and exchanges
salutes with the company commander. The company commander (executive officer
and first sergeant) faces to the right in marching and moves to the next platoon. As
soon as the inspecting office has cleared the first platoon, the platoon leader faces
about, commands LAPIT TALUDTOD, KAD and TIKAS PAHINGA/PALUWAG and
then faces about and executes parade rest/at ease. When the company commander
has completed (exchange salutes with the platoon leader) the inspection of the last
platoon, he returns to his post at the center of the company and commands the
company to “BALANGAY, DA”. He then dismisses the company, as previously
described.
3. IN-QUARTERS INSPECTION (STAND BY)
a. When the company commander wants to conduct an in-quarters inspection,

the members are positioned in line with their equipment or as near it as possible.
The platoon leader positions himself in the path of the inspecting officer at a point
near his area of responsibility. At the approach of the inspecting officer, the platoon
leader commands PULUTONG, HUMANDA, salutes, and reports, “Pinuno, unang
pulutong Tenyente Dela Cruz namumuno, handa napo sa pagsisiyasat.
NOTE: When the situation dictates, the platoon leader may report to the inspecting
officer outside of the quarters. A designated individual command the members to
HUMANDA as the inspecting officer enter the quarters (bay).
b. The platoon leader then guides the inspecting officer along a route dictated
by the physical arrangement of the personnel and equipment. Upon entering the
quarters (bay), the inspecting officer commands PALUWAG. As the inspecting
officer approaches each individual or his equipment, the individual automatically
assumes the position of attention. When the inspecting officer has moved to the next
man, the last inspected resumes the position of at ease. As the inspecting officer
begins to exit the quarters (bay), after completing the inspection, HUMANDA is
commanded. The platoon leader and inspecting officer exchangesalutes.
NOTE: When inspecting fire officer’s rooms, attention is not commanded. The
individuals automatically assume the position of attention as the inspector enters the
room. The inspector then commands PALUWAG. As the inspector approaches each
fire officers, the fire officer assumes the position of attention and resumes at ease
after he has been inspected.


83
CHAPTER VIII
BATTALION AND
BRIGADE
FORMATION

CHAPTER VIII- BATTALION AND BRIGADE FORMATION

84

SECTION A
BATTALION FORMATION
1. GENERAL RULES
a. For the most part, battalion drill merely provides the procedures for
executing company drill in conjunction with other companies in the same formation.
b. For drill purposes, a battalion consists of a headquarters (staff), Colors, and

two or more companies. The right flank unit serves as base when in a line formation;
the leading element is the base when in column.
c. To facilitate the forming of a larger unit, the commander normally alerts the
component units as to the desired formation, time, place, route, uniform, and the
sequence in which the units will form. Unless the right guide’s position at the
formation site has been previously marked, the guides report to the site and receive
instructions prior to the arrival of the troops.
d. The commissioned staff forms in one rank, at normal interval and centered
on the Commander. Staff members are normally arranged in their numerical order
from right to left. When enlisted staff personnel form as part of the other staff, they
form two steps to the rear of their respective staff officer.
2. FORMATIONS
a. The battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column. There are
several variations as to how the separate elements are arranged within either
formation; the battalion may be formed in line with the companies in line with
platoons in line, or battalion in line with companies in column with platoons in line.
From those formations, the battalion may be positioned in a battalion in column with
companies in column, or companies in mass, or companies in column with platoons
in line.
b. When the battalion participates as a separate element of a larger formation,

or when space is limited, it is normally formed in a mass formation in the same
manner as forming a company mass.
3. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BATTALION
a. The Adjutant is responsible for the formation of troops. He takes a position

at the right flank of the line on which the units are to form and faces down the line.
He remains facing down the line until all units are formed and then marches to his
post midway between the line of troops and the proposed position of the
Commander.
NOTE: If guides are used, the Adjutant takes his post as soon as the guides have
been aligned .
b. As the Commander and his staff approaches, the Adjutant commands

(directs) the units HUMANDA, faces the commander, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo,
handa na po ang talupad.”


85
c. The Commander acknowledges the salute and commands SUMALUNAN

KA. The Adjutant marches (TROTS) forward, passes to the Commander’s right, and
takes his post at the right flank staff officer. The Commander then commands or
directs such actions, as he desires, (KALUPUNAN) SUMALIKOD KO, KAD.
d. Normally, the Colors are positioned at the center of the battalion when
formed in line or column, and four (4) steps to the rear of the staff when formed in
mass.
e. To dismiss the Battalion Commander directs PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG

MGA BALANGAY. The Company Commanders render salutes then the Battalion
Commander returns all salutes with one salute. He then dismisses his staff and
commands KALUPUNAN LUMANSAG.
4. INSPECTING THE BATTALION
a. When the battalion is to be inspected, the Adjutant forms the battalion in

line with companies in line and platoons in line.
b. The Adjutant forms the troops, reports, and takes his position with the staff.
When the adjutant has joined the staff, the Battalion Commander directs
“HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT”. Unit commanders face about and give the same
directive. The platoon leaders prepare their platoons for inspection in the same
manner as in company drill. When all of the platoons in each company have
completed Open Ranks and Dress Right, the Company Commander faces the
Battalion Commander.
NOTE: Because of the time involved in inspecting a battalion, the Battalion

Commander normally directs his staff to inspect the companies while he inspects the
Colors and makes a general inspection at the Battalion. The Color guards do not
execute Inspection Arms.
c. As the Battalion Commander (or his designated staff officer) approaches

the company, the Company Commander salutes and reports, “Ginoo, handa na po
ang balangay”. The inspecting officer then proceeds to the first platoon to be
inspected. The Company Commander takes a position to the left of the inspecting
officer. The platoons are inspected in the same manner as explained in company
drill. In the event a platoon has already been inspected, the platoon leader proceeds
first to the inspecting officer and commands his platoon to Attention and renders
salute as the inspecting officer approaches.
d. When the Battalion Commander has returned to the front of the formation
and all staff officers have completed their inspection, the Battalion Commander
commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA and dismisses the battalion. After the inspecting
officer leaves, the platoon leader commands his platoon, MASINSING TALUDTUD
KAD, steps about three (3) steps forward and commands HARAP SA LIKOD NA
and TATLONG HAKBANG PASULONG KAD to occupy its former position.
e. If the battalion is being inspected by a higher commander and his staff, the
Battalion Commander reports to the inspecting officer in the same manner as the
company commanders. The Battalion Commander’s staff takes a position to the left


86

of the higher inspecting staff and escort them to the unit. The Battalion Commander
escorts the higher commander.
Figure 13. Battalion formation (battalion

in line, companies in line, platoons in line,
squads in column, elements in line)
Figure 14. Battalion

formation (battalion in
line, companies in line,
platoons in column,
squads in column,
elements in line)


87
SECTION B
BRIGADE FORMATION
1. GENERAL RULES
a. The brigade, like the battalion has two basic formations – a line and a
column. There are several variations as to how the brigades are arranged within their
formation: the brigade may be formed with battalions in mass, or battalions in line
with companies in mass. From those formations, the brigade may be positioned in
column with battalions in mass, companies in mass, or battalion in column with
companies in column.
b. The formation selected is normally dictated by the space available and the
desire of the commander.
2. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BRIGADE
a. The brigade is formed and dismissed in the same manner as the battalion.
b. Normally, the brigade Color is positioned at the center of the brigade.
Subordinate color-bearer organizations position their Colors to the center of their
formation when in a line or column formation, or four steps to the rear of their staff
when in a mass formation.


88

Figure 15. Brigade

formation (brigade in line,
battalion in line, companies in

line, platoons in line, squads
in column, elements in line)



Figure 16. Brigade formation
(brigade in line, battalions in line,
companies in line, platoons in column,

squads in column, elements in line)

89

91

CHAPTER IX
MILITARY
HONORS

CHAPTER IX- MILITARY HONORS

92
SECTION A
DEFINITION OF TERMS
IN MILITARY HONORS
CORDON HONORS. It is a type of honors rendered to a guest in lieu of or in

addition to full military honors. This may be in the form of foyer, ramp/plane side,
concourse and side honors.
DAIS. This is an elevated platform where the honoree and the Host stand to
give distinction and prominence.
HONOREE. A high-ranking local/foreign military officer or civilian to whom

honors are accorded.
HONOR GUARD. This is consist of a band, Colors, salute battery (when

available and appropriate) and a formation of troops tasked to render personal
honors to persons entitled upon arrival/departure from a military command or
saluting base/station.
HONORS. The ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military officers and

civilian dignitaries as a gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/or position.
INSPECTION. The close examination or observance of honor guard by

honoree.
HOST. It is an officer designated to escort and receive the honoree and

advise him of actions that will take place during the conduct of honors.
RUFFLE AND FLOURISH. It is a ruffling drumbeat and fun fare played in

honor of a high official at a ceremonial reception.
SALUTING STATION. This are camps, posts, stations, national shrines and
other places where conduct of military honors is authorized.
TWO-MAN GUARD. It is a type of honors consisting of two soldiers and an

officer given to civilian or military dignitaries for practical purposes.


93
SECTION B
POLICIES OF MILITARY HONORS
1. PERSONAL HONORS
a. Military/ Uniformed Officers
i. Only BFP general or flag rank officers in the active service are
entitled to military honors unless otherwise directed by the C,BFP.
ii. A retired general/flag officer making an official visit shall likewise be

accorded with appropriate honors.
iii. Newly-promoted generals will only be rendered with full military

honors at NHQ, their respective Major Service camps and their own
headquarters.
iv. Full military honors will no longer be given to officers going to

another place/unit located within their headquarters in the same camp/station.
Instead, cordon honors will be appropriate for the occasion.
b. Civilian dignitaries making official visits shall be accorded appropriate

honors during arrival and departure from military installation/station.
c. When two or more persons entitled to honors arrive at or depart from

military installation/station at the same time, each in turn shall be honored if they
arrived successively. However, in cases when the most senior guest has been
accorded honors, no honors shall be accorded to newly arrived junior guests.
d. Should a person entitled to honors arrive at a station at the time when

honors have already begun, the ceremony shall continue but the senior officer shall
receive departure honors.
e. If the honoree has a personal flag with him, the flag bearer shall be
positioned three steps behind the honoree and shall follow the honoree during the
inspection of troops and return to his original position thereafter.
f. If the honoree is a President or a Head of State, the honoree must be

positioned at least six inches right forward of the host dais.
g. No honors shall be rendered by troops in trenches.
h. Honors shall not be rendered by troops directly engaged in

operations, campaigns, exercises and disaster relief operations.
i. During personal honors at the same place and in compliment to the same
person, whether civilian or military, guns shall never be fired more than once in a
calendar year, except for a President or Head of State or when International Protocol
requires.


94
j. In all cases, the national flag must be at full staff when honors are being
accorded.
k. No military honors will be accorded during a national holiday except for a

President or Head of State or when International Protocol requires.
l. No honors will be accorded after the flag retreat and before flag raising
except honors for the President or his designated representative.
2. UNIT HONORS
a. Local Deployment
i. A ceremony shall be conducted to welcome/send off units

arriving/departing for deployment outside unit AOR for a period of not less
than six months.
ii. The Commander or his representative (at least two-levels up) shall
be responsible in welcoming/sending off units under his jurisdiction.
b. Foreign Deployment
i. Unit concerned shall be responsible for the ceremony in honor of

units arriving/departing from/for overseas deployment.
ii. The Major Service Commander shall welcome/send off

arriving/departing units of his command.
iii. Spouses/parents of deployed personnel shall be invited to send off

or present leis to the officers and men of the departing / arriving unit.
iv. The national salute is done by firing 21 guns successively. This

salute is rendered in honor of: the National Flag; the President of the
Philippines; Heads of State; and Former Presidents. During National Heroes
Day, the National Flag shall be displayed at half-staff from reveille to midday
at all posts, camps, bases and stations. Prior to the rendering of honors the
band of field music will be played.
3. HOW HONORS ARE RENDERED
a. The President
i. The President shall be received at the salute base or at the building

where he shall be entertained.
ii. A 21–gun salute shall be fired during the arrival/departure honors.
iii. In a situation wherein honors will be rendered to the President

outside of military camps and without military units present in the area, a two-
man Honor Guard shall be present at the bottom steps of the aircraft to render
honors. They shall be led by the most senior military commander in the area.


95
When the President steps down from the plane, the honor guards are
positioned facing each other and welcome the President by a salute. The left
man commands PUGAY KAMAY, NA (if without arms) or TANGHAL, TA (if
with arms) as the President approaches and commands HANDA, RAP (if
without arms) or BABA, TA (if with arms) after the President passed by them.
iv. In case the President was already given full military honors at the
point of disembarkation, the President shall no longer be given full military
honors at the area where the President will be going.
v. In case the President will be rendered full military honors in the place
of engagement, the President will be given cordon honors at the point of
disembarkation.
vi. In case the President arrived in front of the troops already massed
and assembled for parade and review in honor of the President, the full
military honors shall be waived to avoid redundancy in rendering honors.
Instead, cordon honors will be appropriate. If the parade and review is to be
rendered in another place of engagement, military honors will be given.
vii. Unless otherwise military honors or cordon honors will be given

to the President, a two-man honor guard will always be present at the bottom
of the aircraft and render salute as the President steps down or boards the
plane.
viii. During the presidential official visit in both Houses of Congress

like in the State of the Nation Address, the President will be accorded cordon
honors before entering the house.
ix. During Independence Day celebration, the President will be

accorded full military honors in front of the grandstand.
x. In case the President or Head of State arrives from the aircraft and
exits by the tube of the terminal, a cordon honors will be positioned to render
honor to the President or Head of State.
b. To Certain Dignitaries. A president of a foreign republic or a foreign

sovereign shall be rendered the honors prescribed in paragraph (a) above except
that the national anthem of his country shall be played first to be followed by the
Philippine National Anthem.
c. To Ex-Presidents and Vice Presidents. The Ex-President and Vice

President of the Philippines shall be rendered the honors prescribed for the
President, except that the flourishes shall be followed by a march in lieu of the
National Anthem and the Vice President shall receive a salute of 19 guns. If no band
is present, the bugles shall sound To the Colors after the ruffles and flourishes.


96
d. To Ambassadors – Foreign Ambassadors will be given one military

honors during their stay in the country. This will be done during their presentation of
credentials at the Malacañan Palace.
e. Civilian and Military Dignitaries hereunder shall be rendered salutes and

honors with music (which is considered an inseparable part of the salute and will
immediately follow the ruffles and flourishes without pause):
NUMBER OF NUMBER OF
RUFFLES AND
GRADE, TITLE, OFFICE GUN SALUTE: GUN SALUTE FLOURISHES MUSIC SIZE
ARRIVAL DEPARTURE
National Anthem/
President 21 21 4 Honors to the Battalion
President
Ex President 19 19 4 March Battalion
National Anthem of
Head of State of a the Foreign Country
21 21 4 Battalion
foreign country followed by Philippine
National Anthem
National Anthem of
Members of Reigning the Foreign Country
21 21 4 Battalion
Royal Family followed by Philippine
National Anthem
Head of Government 19 19 4 March Battalion
Vice President 19 19 4 March Battalion
Senate President 19 19 4 March Battalion
Speaker of the House 19 19 4 March Battalion
The Chief Justice 19 19 4 March Battalion
Secretary of the
Interior and Local 19 19 4 March Battalion
Government
National Anthem of
the Foreign Country
Foreign Ambassadors 19 19 4 Battalion
followed by Philippine
National Anthem
Undersecretaries of the
Interior and Local 19 19 4 March Company
Government
Foreign Envoys and
Ministries Accredited 15 - 3 March
Company
to the Philippines
Foreign Ministers
Accredited to the 13 - - March Company
Philippines
Consul Generals 11 - - March Company
Vice Consuls or
Consular Agents
- - 5 March Company
Accredited to the
Philippines
Chief, BFP 19 19 4 Gen March Battalion
Director General 17 17 4 Gen March Battalion

Deputy Director
15 15 3 Gen March Battalion
General
Director 15 15 3 Gen March Coy
Regional Director 13 - 2 Gen March Coy
Chief Superintendent 11 - 1 Gen March Coy


97
SECTION C
ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE
HONORS (INDIVIDUAL)
1. FULL MILITARY HONORS
Initially, the honor guard battalion shall be at parade rest. The Honor Guard
Commander (HGC) brings the unit to attention as soon as the honoree arrives. The
honoree is met by the host, who escorts him in front of the honor guard battalion and
leads him to the dais.
The HGC faces about and commands PUGAY KAMAY, NA then faces about
and presents sword (if with sword) or performs salute (if without arms) together with
his staff, while the honoree and host execute hand salute.
The appropriate number of ruffles and flourishes shall be played by the band
to be followed by an appropriate music, General’s March or National Anthem as the
case maybe. Gun salute, if any, shall commence with the first note of the ruffles and
shall be evenly distributed until the last note of the music.
After the last note of the music, the HGC carries sword (if with sword) Handa
Harap (if without arms) with the staff then faces about and commands BABA, TA/
HANDA, RAP. He faces about and salutes the honoree, saying “Handa na po ang
tanod pandangal upang libutin”.
The honoree acknowledges the salute and the HGC carries his sword and
escorts him and the host for the inspection of the honor guards. As they approach
the Colors, six paces before it, the HGC commands GINOO, SA MGA WATAWAT,
PUGAY KAMAY, NA (Sir, to the Colors, Present Arms). The HGC Presents
Sword/ Hand Salutes while honoree and host execute hand salute for the Colors.
Three steps after the Colors, HGC commands HANDA, RAP. The HGC executes
carry sword while the honoree and the host drop their hand salute. They continue
marching toward the last elements. The HGC continues marching with the honoree
and host up to the point where he peels off from the two personages and proceeds
to his position in front of his staff. The honoree and host march directly back to their
original positions at the dais.
At this point, the HGC faces the honor guard battalion and commands
PUGAY KAMAY. He then faces about and executes Present Sword (hand salute if
without arms) together with his staff. The honoree acknowledges the salute and
HGC and staff execute Carry Sword /Handa Harap. The HGC faces about and
commands HANDA, RAP. The HGC executes about face and salutes the honoree,
saying “Ginoo/Binibini Tapos na po ang parangal”. The honoree acknowledges
the salute and says “Mangyaring lumapit ka”. The HGC executes Carry Sword and
Return Sword, then steps forward; he halts two steps in front of the honoree and
salutes. The honoree acknowledges the salute and both drop their hands. The
honoree then extends his hand to shake hands with HGC, who takes one step
forward to acknowledge the gesture. After handshake, the HGC salutes the honoree,
once acknowledged, he then faces about and returns to his position.


98
Then the HGC faces the troops and deliver the Honoree’s message by
saying: “MGA KASAMA, IPINAPAABOT NG ATING KAGALANG GALANG NA
PANAUHING PANDANGAL,_______________ ANG KANYANG TAOS PUSONG
PASASALAMAT, SA PARANGAL, NA IGINAWAD NATIN SA KANYA, SA
UMAGANG/HAPONG ITO” then, he executes “about face”.
The honoree and host faces the other and the latter salutes the former. They
then shake hands. The HGC then dismiss the troops upon the conclusion of the
Honors.
NOTE: In case the honoree is more than one, the most senior honoree will be the
one at the dais. In case all are of the same rank or category, one will occupy the dais
and the rest will align beside the honoree to be bestowed with honors. During the
inspection they can join the inspection of the troops. They will follow at the back of
the main honoree for the period of the inspection.
During inclement weather, arrival and departure honors will be waived, except
honors to be accorded for the President and Head of State. They will be accorded
with cordon honors, if practicable.
2. CORDON/SIDE HONORS /HONOR GUARD

In addition to a scheduled honor guard ceremony, an honor cordon
ceremonies will be used during the arrival or departure of the President and certain
dignitaries: welcoming or bidding farewell to distinguished visitors and visiting military
camps. The ceremony consists of a select group of BFP personnel with
characteristics associated with honor guards, designated to honor and provide
security at the immediate arrival and departure site. This type of honors may also be
used for other government and military officials, and foreign dignitaries, if practicable.
The honor cordon normally consists of two squads, a cordon commander and
a host. The size of the squad is equal to the number of gun salute the honoree is
entitled to. When deemed appropriate, the commander may designate a band, colors
and distinguishing flags.
POINT OF ARRIVAL/DEPARTURE

COLORS
Figure 17. Cordon Honors


99
a. Arrival
Upon arrival of the craft or vehicle, the cordon is marched/pre-positioned

near the exit (ramp) in two columns, centered to the exit, faced to the center and
dressed with about three steps distance between the ranks. As the honored guest
and greeting party depart the immediate vicinity of the exit, and approach within
three steps of the host, the cordon commander commands TANGHAL, TA (if with
arms) or PUGAY KAMAY, NA (if without arms) and the cordon members salute
simultaneously.
After the honored guest and all greeting party members have passed the
formation, the cordon commander commands BABA, TA (if with arms) or HANDA,
RAP (if without arms) and the cordon members come to order arms simultaneously.
b. Departure
The formation for the honor cordon upon departure is basically the same as
that described during arrival. At the approach (about three steps) of the honored
guest and host, the cordon commander commands TANGHAL, TA (if with arms) or
PUGAY KAMAY, NA (if without arms) and the cordon executes present arms.
When the honored guest has entered the conveyance, the cordon commander
commands BABA, TA (if with arms) or HANDA, RAP (if without arms) and remains
in place until the conveyance has departed. If it is an aircraft, the honor cordon exits
as soon as the honoree has boarded the aircraft.
When a band and Colors are part of the arrival or departure ceremonies,
they are positioned accordingly. The band plays appropriate music during the
ceremony. The organizational color is dipped in salute when the honored guest
approaches to within six steps. After he passes, it is returned to the carry positions.
As soon as the guest enters the conveyance ceremony, the colors and
distinguishing flags depart the area with the honor cordon.


101
CHAPTER X
PARADE

CHAPTER X- PARADE

102
SECTION A
TYPES OF PARADES AND
THEIR SEQUENCE
A parade is a military ceremony wherein a body of troops is formed before its
Commanding Officer or other high-ranking officer for the display of its condition,
members, equipment and proficiency. It includes exercise in the manual of arms, the
report on the members of the various units present or accounted for, the publication
of orders, etc. and ends with a pass in review.
The preparation and organization of troops for a parade are similar to those
for a review. However, in a parade, since the commander is also the reviewing
officer, the distance between the troops and the commander is greater than that for a
review. Other features are: the band conducts sound off; the inspection is omitted;
reports are rendered; orders are published; and the officers and guidons are
marched forward and centered on the commander. If retreat is scheduled, it is
conducted in lieu of Honors To The Nation. This means that the Retreat is already
the HONORS TO THE NATION.
1. CEREMONIAL BATTALION PARADE
a. Formation of Troops
i. Units are moved to their position on the ready line in the most
convenient manner. The commander prescribes the assembly area, the
routes, sequence, and time of arrival on the line. He and his staff take their
post prior to Adjutant’s call.
ii. The procedure for moving from the ready line to the final line is the
same as that for a review.
b. Sound Off
i. After the battalion has been formed, aligned, and given parade rest
on the parade line, the Adjutant directs: IHUDYAT and assumes the position
of parade rest. He remains facing the formation.
ii. At the directive IHUDYAT, the band plays three sound off chords. At
the conclusion of the third chord, the band moves forward playing a march in
quick time. The band executes a left turn to march across the front of the
troops. At the left of the line of the troops, the band countermarches and
returns over the same ground to the right of the line. After passing beyond the
right of the line of troops, the band executes a right turn, countermarches
again, and halts in its original position. When the band has halted, it ceases
playing at the next convenient place in the music and will again play three
sound-off chords. (Trooping the line by the band may be eliminated when
ceremonies are conducted indoors during inclement weather and when space
is limited).

CHAPTER X- PARADE

103
NOTE: Retreat, when scheduled, is integrated at this point. Upon completion of the
IHUDYAT chords, the Adjutant directs: IHUDYAT ANG PAGSILONG and goes back
to parade rest. The band plays Retreat (by the trumpet section). Upon completion of
Retreat, the Adjutant comes to Attention and directs, MGA BALANGAY HUMANDA,
then PUGAY KAMAY. The Adjutant faces about and salutes. The band plays TO
THE COLOR or THE NATIONAL ANTHEM. At the conclusion of To the Color or the
National Anthem, the Adjutant comes to order and faces about and directs: HANDA,
RAP. After the last unit comes to order arms, the Adjutant faces front. The
commander and his staff assume PARADE REST, ATTENTION, PUGAY KAMAY,
and HANDA, RAP with the Adjutant. The Adjutant’s salute is the signal for the band
to play TO THE COLOR or THE NATIONAL ANTHEM.
c. Honors to the Nation
i. If Retreat is not conducted, the Adjutant (after the band has

completed sound off) assumes the position of attention and directs: MGA
BALANGAY HUMANDA at PUGAY KAMAY.
ii. When all units are in PUGAY KAMAY, the Adjutant salutes. Band
plays the NATIONAL ANTHEM.
iii. The TC and his staff execute on his command: PUGAY KAMAY,
NA on the first note of the music.
iv. Military spectators rise and execute hand salute and its equivalent
for the civilians.
d. Presentation
i. Upon completion of the National Anthem, the TC and his staff

execute on his command: HANDA, RAP. The Adjutant terminates his salute,
faces about, and directs HANDA, RAP.
ii. When all units are at Order Arms, the Adjutant faces about, salutes
and reports: ”Ginoo, handa na po ang patikas”.
iii. The TC returns the salute and commands: SUMALUNAN KA. The
Adjutant trots forward, passes by the TC’s right, and takes his post as the
right flank member of the staff.
e. Manual of Arms/ Harap Harapan
i. After the adjutant has joined the staff, the battalion commander
commands such movements in the manual of arms as he may desire.
ii. The commander directs “HUMANDA SA PAGSASANAY SA

PAGHAWAK NG SANDATA (with drill arms)/ PAGSASANAY SA HARAP
HARAPAN (without drill arms)”. He then, in sequence, commands
KANANG BALIKAT, TA; KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA; AGAP, TA; SIYASAT,
TA; and BABA, TA/ HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP; HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP;
HARAP SA KANAN RAP; and HARAP SA LIKOD RAP.

CHAPTER X- PARADE

104
f. Report
i. When the manual of arms has been completed, the TC then

directs: TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT.
ii. The Adjutant trots forward, halts to his position at the center of the
command and directs: MAG-ULAT. Unit commanders in succession, from
right to left, salute and report: “Ginoo __________ balangay, narito na po
lahat, napagalaman”. The Adjutant returns each commander’s salute.
iii. After receiving the reports, the Adjutant faces front, salutes, and
reports: “Ginoo, narito po lahat, napag-alaman”.
g. Publishing of Orders
i. The TC returns the salute and directs: IPAHAYAG ANG

KAUTUSAN.
ii. The Adjutant faces about and gives the orders: MAKINIG SA
KAUTUSAN, ANG MGA NAKATALAGA NGAYON, PUNONG
PANLARANGAN (NAME OF OFFICER), PUNONG TAGAPANGALAGA
(NAME OF OFFICER), SA UTOS NI (NAME OF OFFICER), MGA PINUNO,
HUMARAP AT PUMAGITNA, KAD.
h. Officers Center March
i. At the last note of PUMAGITNA, all officers from the Battalion

Commanders to Platoon Leaders including Guidon Bearers, execute Center
Face. At the command of execution of KAD is given, the Officers and Guidon
Bearers march off to the center and halt at predetermined number of steps
upon reaching their designated markers. The senior Battalion/Company
Commander then commands: MGA PINUNO, RAP, KAD. At the last note of
RAP, the Officers and Guidon Bearers face toward the TC’s position and
shoves off at the command KAD.
ii. When they are approximately 12 paces in front of the Battalion

Commander, the senior Company Commander commands: MGA PINUNO,
TO. At TO, they count silently. At the count of four, they execute the salute
and bring their hands down at seven (Guidon Bearers start to execute the
equivalent salute at the count of three and return same starting at the count of
six). The Battalion Commander acknowledges the salute, then commands:
MGA PINUNO, SUMALUNAN, KAD.
iii. The group of officers executes about face and shoves off towards
the center of the troops. As they approach the line of their respective
positions, the senior Company Commander commands: MGA PINUNO, TO,
RAP, KAD. At the command TO, they halt, and almost simultaneous with
RAP, they face their respective positions and shove off with the command
KAD. At a predetermined number of steps, they halt to occupy their
respective positions and face front at the same time.

CHAPTER X- PARADE

105
i. Pass in Review
i. When all officers have returned to their posts and the band has
stopped playing, the Troop Commander will ask permission to the reviewing
officer “PINUNO, HANDA NA PO ANG TALUPAD PARA SA PASA MASID”,
the battalion commander commands “PASA MASID”
ii. The troop passes in review in the same manner as prescribed for a
review except that the units render honors when they are six steps to the left
of the Troop Commander and staff, and terminate honors when the units are
six steps to the right of the commander of troops and staff. The Troop
Commander and staff then assume the role of the reviewing party at their
location on the field.
iii. When the last elements of troops have passed the reviewing
officer, the battalion commander and staff returns to the center. On the last
note of “TO” the band stops playing, the battalion commander reports to the
reviewing officer “PINUNO, TAPOS NA PO ANG PASA MASID”.
iv. Spectators may rise and applause after the parade is completed.
2. CEREMONIAL BRIGADE PARADE
a. The brigade is ordinarily formed in line with battalions in mass formations.

The parade is the same as the ceremonial battalion parade with the following
exceptions:
i. The Brigade Commander is substituted for Battalion Commander,

and brigade for battalion, in the description. It is addressed as “Sampanaw”.
ii. Across the front of the brigade, the band passes in front of the line of
Battalion Commanders during the sound off.
b. The battalions execute present arms, order arms, parade rest, and come to
attention on the command of execution of their respective commanders. Reports are
made by the Battalion Commanders instead of Company Commanders.
c. At the command of execution KAD, of MGA PINUNO PUMAHARAP AT

PUMAGITNA, KAD the Battalion Commanders, their staff, and Colors close on the
line of Battalion Commanders and staffs. The Company Commanders face to the
half right or half left in marching and close on a line four steps to the rear of the
battalion color. The Guidon Bearers face half right of half left in marching and close
on a line four steps to the back of the Company Commanders. The other officers
face the Guidon Bearers.
d. When the officers, Guidon Bearers, and Colors have closed and faced to
the front, the senior battalion commander commands PINUNO, TO. The center
officer of the leading rank is the guide. On the command of the senior Battalion
Commander, the officers, Guidon Bearers, and Colors halt with the leading ranks six
steps from the Brigade Commander. They execute TANGHAL, TA and HANDA,
RAP headed by the Battalion Commanders in front.

CHAPTER X- PARADE

106
e. All officers will execute HARAP SA LIKOD, marches back in front of the
colors. The senior battalion commander commands MGA PINUNO, TO so that the
rank of Battalion Commanders is on line with its original position. The Battalion
Commanders and staff face outward, the battalion Color guard executes wheeling
movements, and on the command of execution KAD the color guard marches back
to its original position. The Company Commanders, Guidon Bearers, and other
officers face to the half right or half left in marching and move back to their original
positions.
3. STREET PARADE
a. For street parade, troops are formed and marched in the most convenient
manner. Street parade may include vehicles.
b. Practical formations for street parades are:
i. Columns of threes and fours.
ii. Two or more columns of threes and fours abreast.
iii. Mass formation.
c. The vehicles move in single column of twos, threes, or fours abreast, as

the width of the street permits.
d. In order to keep units in the same cadence, units should not march
between two bands.
4. EVENING PARADE
The Ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:
a. One brigade of two battalions (two companies of two platoons each).
b. Band of not less than 30 members with a band conductor.
c. Two color bearers for the National and unit colors, and two color
guards.

CHAPTER X- PARADE

107
CHAPTER XI
REVIEWS

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

108
SECTION A
GENERAL RULES AND
INFORMATION ON REVIEWS
A review is an inspection of troops by a high officer or honored guest as a way
of showing its troops’ unit strength, state of discipline and preparedness.
1. PURPOSES OF REVIEWS
Reviews are often mistaken to be the same as parades. While features are
similar, these are two distinct ceremonies although the combination of the two is
normally practiced. A review is a military ceremony used to:
a. Honor a visiting high-ranking commander, officials, or dignitary

and/or permit them to observe the state of training of a unit.
b. Present decorations and awards.
c. Honor or recognize unit or individual achievements.
d. Commemorate events.
It is more fitting therefore to entitle a program “A Review in Honor of

________” or “A Review in Commemoration of _______” instead of calling it a
parade and review when actually what would be done is only a review.
2. GENERAL RULES
Normally, a review is conducted with a battalion-size or larger troop unit.

However, a composite or representative element consisting of two or more platoons
may serve the same purpose. A review consists of the following steps in sequence:
a. Formation of troops;
b. Presentation of Command and Honors;
c. Inspection of troops;
d. Honors to the Nation;
e. Remarks;
f. Pass-in-Review;
g. Conclusion.
Note: The review stage may be omitted for decorations, awards, or individual
recognition ceremonies.
Other ceremonial activities or combinations thereof, those maybe

incorporated within a framework of reviews are:
a. Review with decorations, awards and individual recognition

ceremonies.
b. Review with change of command, activation, or de-activation of

units.
c. Review with retreat.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

109
d. Review with retreat and retirement, decorations, and awards.
e. Review with retreat and change of command, activation, or de-

activation of units.
f. Review and parade with all of the above combinations.
To enable himself to review his own command with a visiting Reviewing

Officer (RO), a commander normally designates an Officer of his command as Troop
Commander (TC). The TC is responsible for the preparation of the troops for the
review.
Any of the formations described for the Battalion or Brigade may be used. The
following are the three recommended formations for conducting a review:
a. Battalion Formation with Companies in Line (Figure 18). The

Battalion is composed of a minimum of two (2) Companies with two (2) to
three (3) Platoons per Company.
Figure 18: Battalion Formation with Companies in Line
Note: Arrow points from the last element to the guide of the next platoon
b. Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line (Figure 19). The

Brigade is composed of a minimum of two (2) Battalions with three (3)
Companies each. However, a minimum of two (2) Companies per Battalion is
recommended, provided that the Companies are always composed of 2-3
Platoons each.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

110
Figure 19: Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line
c. Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass

(Figure 20). The same composition as in Figure 19. The participation of the
saluting battery should be considered as part of the formation whenever
possible by the space available.
Figure 20: Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

111
The formation selected is determined by the space available and other
desires of the commander. Commanders may alter the formation or prescribed
distances to meet local situations. Each unit should be sized uniformly with the tallest
men in front and on the right. Commanders should not cause the leaders to change
positions because of their size. Officers and other key non-commissioned officers,
including squad leaders and other equivalent by virtue of their rank and time in
service, should participate in their deserved positions of dignity. THEY SHOUD NOT
ALTER NOR MODIFY THE SEQUENCE OF EVENTS OTHER THAN STATED.
If possible, the Distinguished Guest/Reviewing Officer (DG/RO) should arrive

at his post (Figure 21) after the staff of the TC has reversed and the TC has faced
the reviewing stand. Upon arrival, the DG/RO shall immediately take his post and
refrain from greeting distinguished spectators until after the review has terminated.
The DG/RO, BFP Host (BH/Host), and distinguished persons invited to attend
the review (but not themselves receiving the review), take position facing the troops.
Host
Flag of Host
Figure 21: Reviewing Officer Party
When a ceremony is conducted for an individual junior in rank to the Host, the
junior takes a position to the left of the Host unless the Host yields the post of honor
to him. Normally, the honor position is the position on the right and is the DG/RO’s
post, The Host gives the appropriate directive to the TC: IHANDOG AND
PAMUNUAN (PRESENT THE TROOPS) to start the conduct of the review. (This
arrangement will not hold true if the guests and host are seated at the grandstand.
The protocol on seating arrangement shall be followed). When a civilian or foreign
dignitary receives the review, he takes the honor position to the right of the Host. The
Host returns all salutes when, in his judgment, it would be more appropriate. As a

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

112
courtesy, the Host should cue the dignitary and inconspicuously explain the
procedures during the conduct of the ceremony. The position in which the flags are
displayed at the rear of the reviewing party corresponds to the position taken by the
individual in the front rank of the reviewing party.
NOTE: Designated host shall be at least the same or one rank grade lower but shall
not precede the rank of the DG/RO.
When a ceremony is conducted honoring a foreign official or dignitary entitled

to honors, equivalent honors (salutes) are rendered.
NOTE: If the honors of the dignitary include his or her nation’s anthem, the honors
are played in the following order: four ruffles and flourishes, the foreign anthem, an
approximate three-second drum rolls, and the Philippine National Anthem.
When the ceremony includes decorations, awards, or retirements, the Host

should be senior in rank or position to the highest-ranking individual being honored.
Protocol officer from BFP is designated to escort and brief the members of the
reviewing party and to show them their positions.
Since all situations or eventualities relative to various services or units

(military academies, special honor guards, regular BFP units, reserve components,
Reserve Officer Training Corps, and training commands/centers cannot be foreseen)
commanders can make changes to stated procedures. However, with a view towards
preserving the BFP tradition and maintaining consistency, “THEY SHOULD NOT
ALTER NOR MODIFY THE SEQUENCE OF EVENTS OTHER THAN STATED.”
SECTION B
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND
INDIVIDUAL ACTIONS
1. REVIEW (STANDARD)
a. FORMATION OF TROOPS
i. As soon as the troops are ready, the Troop Adjutant (TA) (from his
position near the band) directs IHUDYAT ANG PAGHANDA. The band
immediately sounds ATTENTION CALL to signal the start of the ceremony.
ii. Upon hearing the ATTENTION CALL, all Battalion Commanders

(BCs) face about; bring their units to attention (dressing of units), then face
front.
iii. The TA again directs IHUDYAT ANG TAWAG ADYUTANTE. The

band sounds the ADJUTANT’S CALL, immediately followed by March music.
iv. The BCs give PASULONG, KAD, the troops follow the route
illustrated in Figure 22.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

113
v. When the elements are already perpendicular with their
markers, TC (over all command of the elements) commands TALUPAD, TO,
the elements, upon the command of execution TO, halts and face front.
Note: In cases of situation needs to have company/ Battalion control, the TC may
choose to do so.
Figure 22. Route to be followed by the troops.
NOTE: Entrance of troops is optional. The review may start with the troops already in
position in front of the Reviewing Officer. In which case, Attention Call shall be
sounded to signal the start of the ceremony. The Troop Adjutant commands MGA
GABAY SUMALUNAN, then follow the sequence starting from Sec B para 1.a.vi.
vi. The TA designates the Alpha Company as the base company “A”
BALANGAY then positions himself midway between the line of troops and the
TC.
vii. At the last note of “A” Balangay, the BCs simultaneously order:
TUNTON SA KANAN. This means that all Companies will align with the base
company.
viii. The Company Commanders (CC) simultaneously face about then

order: TUNTON SA KANAN.
ix. The Platoon Leaders (PL) simultaneously face about and

command: TUNTON KANAN, NA. After which, they face to the half left
(except the last PL who faces to the half right) and march directly and align at
the right of the platoon sergeant (last element of the first squad, for the last
th
PL) counting thirteen (13) steps (close with the 14 step).
x. The PLs align facing the TA former position then face about
th
immediately after closing on the 14 step, except the last PL who remains
facing the TA’s former position.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

114
xi. Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the second
PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word. The PL aligns the platoon by
taking short steps to the right or left as necessary to see down the squad.
xii. After giving the prolonged order TATAG, the last PL executes
two (2) left steps as visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will
return to his former position by executing two (2) right steps.
xiii. After the last PL has executed the two (2) right steps, the other
PLs simultaneously execute left face (right face for the last PL) and march five
(5) half steps (closes on the sixth half step) then face the second squad.
xiv. Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the second

PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word.
xv. After the prolonged order TATAG, all PLs simultaneously

execute left face (right face for the last PL) and march five (5) half steps
(closes on the sixth half step) then face the last squad.
xvi. Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the second

PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word.
xvii. After giving the prolonged order TATAG, the last PL executes
two (2) right steps as visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will
return to his former position by executing two (2) left steps.
xviii. After the last PL has executed the two (2) left steps, the other
PLs simultaneously execute right face (left face for the last PL) and march five
(5) steps (close on the sixth step) toward the front edge of the platoon,
approximately two (2) steps forward of the platoon, then face down the line.
xix. Simultaneously, all PLs command: HANDA, RAP, then march

forward toward the center of the platoon counting five (5) steps and execute
right turn towards his position closing on the fourteenth step (approximately
six steps from the elements); then face front.
xx. The CC followed by the BC then faces front.
xxi. The TA now directs: MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN.
xxii. TA reports to TC: Ginoo, handa na po ang talupad.
xxiv. TC acknowledges the salute and says: “SUMALUNAN KA”.
xxv. As soon as the TA is posted, the TC commands: “KALUPUNAN

SUMALIKOD KO, KAD”.
b. PRESENTATION OF COMMAND AND HONORS
i. When the DG/RO has halted at his post, the TC faces about and
directs PUGAY KAMAY.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

115
ii. When the units have completed this movement, the TC faces about
and executes with his staff: PUGAY KAMAY, NA.
iii. Upon completion of the presentation and/or honors, the TC

commands his staff: HANDA RAP, faces about and directs: HANDA RAP.
iv. The TC faces to the front.
c. INSPECTION OF TROOPS
i. When the TC has faced the reviewing stand, the DG/RO and Host
move forward and halt three steps in front of the TC. Staffs, aides-de-camp,
and orderlies do not normally accompany the inspecting party. However, if the
DG/RO is mounted during the inspection, his personal Color and aide-de-
camp should be on another vehicle.
ii. The TC salutes and reports: “Ginoo, handa na po ang mga

talupad upang siyasatin.” (Sir, the troops are ready for inspection). The
band begins to play march music on the first left step of the DG/RO and
continues to play until the DG/RO has returned to his post.
iii. The DG/RO acknowledges the salute and the TC escorts the
DG/RO (to be at the center), the Host (to be at the left of the DG/RO) for the
inspection of troops. As they approach the first element of the band, the Host
will position at the right of the TC so that the DG/RO will be nearest the
troops. After the last element of the troops, the Host will position at the left of
the DG/RO. When riding a vehicle, the reviewing party passes between the
line of Battalion Commanders and Company Commanders. When marching,
the reviewing party passes between the front rank of the troops and the
Platoon Leaders when companies are in line formation.
iv. When the inspection is made by motor vehicle, the inspecting party
enters the vehicle in front of the reviewing stand. The DG/RO enters first and
occupies the left rear position. The vehicle approaching from the left of the
TC, proceeds to the post of the TC and stops. The TC salutes and enters the
vehicle, occupying the right front position.
v. When the reviewing party marches while trooping the line and is
about to pass, the Platoon Leader faces about and commands: TINGIN SA
KANAN, NA, The elements turn their heads to the right and see the honoree
as they pass by. The Platoon Leader executes eyes left then faces front after
the inspecting party has passed the platoon. Simultaneously, the Battalion
and Company Commander faces front and commands: KALUPUNAN,
SUMALIKOD KO, KAD; and MGA GABAY SUMALIKOD KO, KAD
respectively, to witness the inspecting party. However, if the inspecting party
is riding for the trooping the line, the Company Commander and staff stay put
and just execute eyes right. More so, the Platoon Leader faces front after
giving the command TINGIN SA KANAN, NA.
vi. As the inspecting party approaches the Colors, the TC

inconspicuously commands GINOO, SA MGA WATAWAT, PUGAY KAMAY,

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

116
NA (Sir, to the Colors, Present Arms) six steps to the Colors; then TC
commands HANDA, RAP (Ready Front) immediately after the Colors.
v. Upon reaching the last element of the troops, the inspecting party
return to their respective positions using the most direct route.
d. HONORS TO THE NATION
i. When the inspecting party has returned to its post, the TC faces
about and directs PUGAY KAMAY. The TC faces front and commands:
PUGAY KAMAY, NA for himself and his staff. On the execution of the Hand
Salute by the TC, the band begins to play the National Anthem.
ii. The inspecting party and all military spectators salute while the
National Anthem is being played.
iii. Upon completion of the National Anthem, the TC and staff

terminate their salutes on his command: HANDA, RAP. He then faces about
and directs HANDA, RAP.
e. REMARKS
This refers to the program proper.
f. PASS-IN-REVIEW
i. The TC brings his staff behind him, KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD

KO, KAD. When the staff has reversed its position, the TC directs PASA
MASID. The band moves to march position.
ii. The DG/RO moves forward to acknowledge the salute of the troops
passing before the grandstand.
iii. When the Colors pass before the reviewing stand, the band
interrupts the music and plays four ruffles and flourishes. The spectators
execute Hand Salute or the equivalent salute for the civilians.
iv. The band continuously plays until the last parade elements leave
the parade ground.
v. When all the troops and floats have cleared the parade ground, the
TC and staff move forward facing the grandstand and halt ten steps in front of
the DG/RO. The TC salutes and the DG/RO acknowledges the salute. He
may or may not thank or congratulate the TC and staff.
g. CONCLUSION
This refers to the conclusion of the event/ceremony.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

117
2. OTHER TYPES OF REVIEW
a. REVIEW WITH DECORATIONS, AWARDS, AND INDIVIDUAL

RETIREMENT
i. If the inspection is omitted, the TC shall command: ANG MGA

TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT, PUMAGITNA, KAD. The
ceremony then continues.
ii. The procedures mentioned below provide latitude for recognition
of one or a group of retirees of various ranks. However, the local commanders
should consider it appropriate to cause the review to be conducted in the
retiree’s honor when only one distinguished individual is retiring and allow that
individual to participate as the reviewing officer. When the Colors are marched
forward the reviewing officer (retiree) would position himself in front and
center of the Colors. After remarks by the host, the retiree returns to the
reviewing officer’s post.
iii. The procedures for the formation of troops, presentation and
honors, and inspection remain the same as previously mentioned.
iv. When the reviewing officer has completed the inspection and has
returned to his post, the TC faces about and directs, ANG MGA TAONG
PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA, KAD.
v. The persons to be decorated and retirees are formed initially at

the ready line at normal distance behind the last rank of the Color unit. (An
alternate position for these personnel may be six steps to the left and in line
with the reviewing officer. They then join the detachment after the Colors are
brought forward.) They line up from left to right according to the rank of the
decoration to be received. Those persons receiving decorations of the same
rank will take positions according to their military rank. On the command
PUMAGITNA, the persons to be decorated shall execute a Left Face. On the
command KAD, they march forward to clear the left rear of the unit they have
joined. They then execute a Column Right, march six steps and execute a
Column Left, halt in a position centered on the Colors, and execute a Right
Face. The last man in the file gives the commands Halt and Right Face.
vi. When unit Colors or Guidons are to be decorated, they are

accompanied by their commanders and shall be positioned in a single rank
five steps in front of the persons to be decorated according to the rank of the
decorations to be bestowed, the highest ranking decoration on the right. The
senior staff officer (for the battalion) or platoon leader (for the company)
assumes command in the absence of the commander.
vii. The staff of the TC on the command PUMAGITNA executes a

Right Face. On the command KAD, the staff marches forward far enough to
provide clearance for the Colors and persons to be honored. The staff then
halts and executes Left Face on command of the rear staff officer.
viii. The TC marches forward and takes his post five steps in front
of, and centered on, the leading element. He faces front and commands:
DESTAKAMENTO PASULONG, KAD. On the command KAD, the band

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

118
begins to play march music and continuous playing until the detachment is
halted in front of the reviewing officer. The TC, persons to be honored, and
Colors march forward. The TC commands: DESTAKAMENTO, TO, when he
is approximately six steps from the reviewing officer, he then salutes and
reports: Ginoo, narito na po ang mga taong pararangalan at mga
watawat. The reviewing officer acknowledges the salute. The host (local
commander) directs: Ihandog ang Pamunuan.
ix. The TC faces to the right while marching, passes around the
right flank of the persons being honored, and proceeds directly to his post,
two steps in front of and centered on his staff. He then directs: HANDA, RAP.
Unit commanders face about and command: HANDA, RAP. They then face
about and execute the Hand Salute. The TC then faces front and commands:
PUGAY KAMAY, NA. The TC and his staff come to a salute with the
detachment.
x. Honors to the Nation shall be rendered at this time. At the last
note of the National Anthem, the TC commands (for himself, his staff and
detachment), HANDA, RAP. He then faces about and directs: HANDA, RAP.
Unit commanders terminate their salutes, face about, and command: BABA,
TA. The TC again directs TIKAS PAHINGA. In turn, unit commanders
command: TIKAS, NGA. They then face the front as with the TC.
xi. The reviewing officer accompanied by the Host, advances by
the most direct route to the right front of the line of persons to be honored.
The (command) ESFO (carrying the awards or certificates) positions himself
one step to the rear and one 15-inch step to the left of the Host. After the
citation is read, the ESPO immediately steps forward and gives the award to
the Host who in turn gives it to the reviewing officer. After the award has been
secured, the ESPO returns to his original position to the rear of the Host. The
ESPO moves with the reviewing officer down the line of the awardees. As
soon as the reviewing party has halted in front of the first awardee, a narrator
reads the citation. The narrator pauses between citations to permit the
reviewing officer time to pin the medal on the person being decorated and
move to the next man, or to fasten the streamer on the staff of the guidon or
Colors. As the reviewing officer approaches the Guidon to be decorated, the
bearer executes Present Guidon so the reviewing officer may fasten the
streamer. Guidon bearer lowers the Guidon to be decorated far enough for
the reviewing officer to fasten the streamer. The Guidon bearer gathers the
Guidon around the staff so it won’t touch the ground. He resumes the Carry
position after the streamer has been attached reviewing officer and his party
return to their post.
xii. When the last award has been presented, the TC commands his
staff to attention, faces about and directs: TALUPAD, DA. The TC faces front
and commands: (loud enough for the band to hear) MGA TAONG
PINARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT, SUMALUNAN, KAD. On the
command SUMALUNAN, the persons being honored execute Right Face. On
the command KAD, they return to their original posts.
xiii. On the command KAD, the band plays marching drum beats
until the Colors and the awardees are back to their original posts.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

119
b. RETIREMENT PROGRAM
i. Invocation.
ii. Reading of Retirement Orders (this part includes the retirement of
badge) by the Unit Adjutant.
iii. Remarks are made at this time. If the honoree (retiree) is senior,
the host (local commander) gives the remarks first then introduces the
honoree (retiree). The TC may be requested to give TIKAS PAHINGA.
iv. After the remarks, the host (local commander) directs, PASA
MASID.
v. The procedures from this point on are the same as previously
described.
c. REVIEW WITH CHANGE OF COMMAND
(See Chapter XIV- CHANGE OF COMMAND CEREMONY)
d. REVIEW WITH RETREAT

i. The Formation of Troops, Presentation of Command and Honors,
Inspection, and Honors To The Nation are the same as previously described.
ii. At the completion of the Honors To The Nation, the TC commands

his staff to HANDA, RAP, faces about, and directs: HANDA, RAP. After its
execution, TC directs: TIKAS PAHINGA. The TC then directs: IHUDYAT ANg
PAGSILONG, faces front, and commands his staff TIKAS PAHINGA. As
soon as the TC and his staff are at parade rest, the band sounds Retreat. At
the conclusion of Retreat, the TC commands his staff to attention, faces the
troops, and directs: TALUPAD (SAMPANAW), DA. When the troops are at
attention, the TC directs: PUGAY KAMAY, NA; then faces the reviewing
officer and commands his staff: PUGAY KAMAY, NA. This is the signal for
the band to play TO THE COLORS.
iii. When the ceremony is held on a military post, the cannon is fired
once (when applicable and/ or appropriate) after the retreat, and immediately
after the command PUGAY KAMAY. While the TO THE COLORS is being
played, the flag is lowered.
iv. The reviewing officer, his staff and military spectators stand at the
position of Attention during the sounding of retreat. On the first note of TO
THE COLORS, they salute and hold their salute until the last note is played.
v. On the last note of music, the TC commands: HANDA RAP for
himself and his staff, faces about, and directs: HANDA RAP. As soon as the
troops have executed order arms, the TC directs: PASA MASID.
vi. The procedures from this point on are the same as previously.

CHAPTER XI- REVIEWS

121
CHAPTER XII
COLORS

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

122

SECTION A
THE COLORS AND THE COLOR
The term Colors mean the national and positional or organizational colors.
When used singularly, the term Color refers to the National Color (National Flag).
1. GENERAL RULES
a. Only the National Color is entitled to a salute by individuals or units.
b. In garrison, the Colors are normally kept at the office or headquarters of

the commanding officer. They are escorted to and from the headquarters or office
by the Color Guard. In the field, the Colors are normally displayed from reveille to
retreat in front of the commanding officer’s tent or command post. During inclement
weather, they are cased and placed in the commanding officer’s office,
headquarters, or tent.
c. Individuals or units render honors when passing or are being passed by

uncased Colors. When not part of a formation, individual salute at a six step distance
from the Colors and hold the salute until they have passed six steps beyond the
Colors. The individual in charge of a formation calls the formation to HUMANDA and
PUGAY KAMAY, NA.
d. The Colors may be carried in any formation wherein two or more

companies, honor guards, or representative elements of a command participate.
e. Traditionally, the command Color Officer is responsible for the

safeguarding, care, and display of the organizational color. He is also responsible for
the selection, training, and performance of the Color bearers and Color guards.
f. The regulation for individual flags and distinguishing flags for general
officers and other dignitaries is the same as that for organizational colors.
g. During a review, parade, or honor guard ceremony, only one National Color
should be present. The National Color is given the honor position and is carried on
marching, at the right of positional and organizational colors. The organizational
color of the senior headquarters sponsoring the ceremony is carried to the left of the
Major Service flag. The Colors belonging to the headquarters conducting the
ceremonies are positioned in line with and centered on the command. Subordinate
Color-bearing organizations ordinarily carry only their organizational colors (four
steps to the rear of their staff).
h. When the formation of the Colors is en masse, the National Color is placed
in front and at the center of the Color guards. The organizational colors are placed
immediately behind the National Color and arranged according to the seniority of the
units participating in the ceremony.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

123
2. SALUTES
a. The National Color renders no salute (dip).
b. The organizational color salutes (dips) in all military ceremonies while the
National Anthem, To the Color, or a foreign national anthem is being played, and
when rendering honors to the organizational commander, an individual of higher
grade including foreign dignitaries of higher grade, and in other cases specified.
c. When marching, organizational colors salute six steps before the person
entitled to the salute. They are returned to the carry position six steps after the
person.
SECTION B
MANUAL FOR COLOR GUARD/BEARER
1. COLOR GUARD
a. To be selected as a member of the Color Guard is an honor. The Color

Guard consists of one (1) Junior Commissioned Officer (CO) or Senior Sergeant
NCO; two (2) Sergeant NCO; and two (2) Junior NCO. The Junior CO acts as the
Color Officer who gives the necessary commands for the movements of the Color
Guard and for rendering honors.
b. When battalions or brigades carry their organizational colors in a ceremony

as part of a larger command, the battalion or brigade color is carried four steps to the
rear of the staff. A Senior NCO acts as Color bearer and two-experienced Junior
NCO act as members of the Color Guard.
c. The Color guards are formed and marched in one rank at close interval, the
bearer in the center. They do not execute Rear March or About Face. The Color
guards march at the Right Shoulder Arms and execute facing movements by
wheeling to the right or left. The command for a facing movement is, PIHIT SA
KANAN (KALIWA), NA. To execute a wheeling movement, the guard nearest the
direction of the turn serves as the pivot point and executes the movement by
marching in place and simultaneously turning in the new direction. Other members
shorten their steps and turn in an arc keeping abreast of each other to maintain
alignment. When the movement has been completed, each member automatically
marches in place until the command TILAP, TO or PASULONG, KAD is given.
d. When passing in review, the Color guards execute Eyes Right at the
prescribed saluting distance on the command of the Color sergeant. The commands
are HANDA KANAN TINGIN and HANDA RAP. The organizational color salutes at
the command NA, and resumes the carry position at the command RAP. The guard
on the right flank of the Color Guard does not execute Eyes Right.
e. During ceremonies, the color guards remain at Right Shoulder Arms except
when presenting arms.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

124

f. When not participating in a ceremony and a situation that warrants a salute
by the organizational color occurs, the Color Sergeant commands PUGAY,
WATAWAT. The return to the carry is made at the command HANDA DALA,
WATAWAT.
g. When in formation with the Color Company, and not during a ceremony, the
Color bearers execute at ease and rest, keeping the staff of the Colors vertical. The
Color guards execute the Right Shoulder, Order Arms, and Present Arms with the
Color Company. During ceremonies when the Colors are not forward and remarks
are to be made, the Color guards and Color bearers execute Order Arms and
Parade Rest on command of the Color Company Commander. During any ceremony
when the units are At Ease, the Color guards and Color bearers are at Parade Rest.
h. The uniform for color guards should be the same as that of the prescribed
for participating troops.
2. ORGANIZATIONAL
The Color Guard consists of five men. The most senior man is the Color
Officer who commands the guards. The next two senior men are the color bearers,
and the two other men, junior to the color bearers, are the color guards. The two
color bearers are unarmed, and the color guards carry either pistols or rifles. The
senior color bearer carries the National Color, and the junior color bearer carries the
organizational colors. When only the National Colors is carried, the Color Guard will
have one-color bearer.
3. FORMATION

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

125
The Color Guard is formed and marched in one rank at close interval. The
National Color bearer is ALWAYS ON THE RIGHT, with the organizational color
bearer to his left, and the color guards on each side; while the Color Officer is
centered on the rear of the formation.
The Color Guard does not execute to the Rear March, facing movements,
flanking or color movement, or fix bayonets. When any such commands are
executed by the unit to which the Color Guard is attached, except fix bayonets, the
Color Officer orders an appropriate movement to bring his guard to proper position.
The Color Guard then executes PALUWAG and PAHINGA with the Color
Company (battalion). However there is no prescribed position of At Ease or Rest for
the Color Guard. When such commands are given to the Color Company (Battalion),
the Color Guard executes TIKAS, PAHINGA.
4. MANUAL OF THE COLORS
a. Order Color - At Order color, the lower ferrule rest on the deck, touching
the outside edge of the shoes just opposite the little toe. The staff is grasped in the
“V” formed by the thumb and fingers of the right hands, back of the hand to the right
front. The right elbow should be close to the side so the forearm will help support the
staff. The staff rests in the hollow of the right shoulder in a vertical position. The flat
side of the spearhead is toward the front. The rest of the body is at attention. Color
guards armed with the rifle are at Order Arms (both rifles at the right side) when the
Colors are at the order.
ORDER COLOR

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

126

b. Carry Color from Order Color - The command is HANDA DALA,
WATAWAT. On the preparatory command, HANDA DALA, change the grasp on the
staff so as to grasp it from the rear between the thumb and fingers of the right hand,
fingers joined and wrapped around the staff. On the command of execution,
WATAWAT, raise the staff smartly with the right hand to a point where the lower
ferrule is just above the sling socket. Grasp the staff just above the lower ferrule with
the left hand to steady it. Seat the lower ferrule in the sling socket. As the ferrule is
seated, allow the right hand to slide down the staff to a point where the thumb is
directly in front of the chin. Grasp the staff firmly with the right hand and return the
left hand to the left side. The right arm should be parallel to the deck, with the staff
inclined slightly forward. Color Guards armed with rifles execute Right and Left
Shoulder Arms on the command WATAWAT so that the rifles are on the outboard
shoulder.
CARRY COLOR FROM ORDER COLOR

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

127
c. Order Color from Carry Color - The command is BABA, WATAWAT. On

the preparatory command, BABA, grasp the staff just above the sling socket and
remove the ferrule. On the command of execution, WATAWAT, lower the ferrule to a
point above the deck along the outside of the right shoe, releasing the left hand and
regrasping above the right. Relax the right hand so the staff will slide down between
the thumb and fingers. Then change the position of the color and right hand as it is
held at order color and smartly return the left hand to the left side.
ORDER COLOR FROM CARRY COLOR

last count will bring to Order Color
d. Present Color from Order Color - The command is TANGHAL,

WATAWAT. On the preparatory command, TANGHAL, change the grasp of the
right hand on the staff so as to grasp it firmly from the rear between the thumb and
fingers joined and wrapped around the staff. At the same time, the National Color
bearer will raise the staff smartly with the right hand to a point where the lower
ferrule is just above the sling socket. Grasp the staff with the left hand just above the
lower ferrule to steady it. Seat the lower ferrule in the sling socket, allowing the right
hand to slide down the staff so the right thumb is in front of the chin, and grasp the
staff firmly with the right hand. The right arm is parallel to the deck, staff inclined
slightly forward. On the command of execution, TA, the organizational color bearer
will execute the same movements as the National Color bearer. Both color bearers
will then return their left hand to the left side. The Color guards execute Present
Arms (Hand Salute if armed with the pistol) on the command of TANGHAL, TA.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

128

PRESENT COLOR
e. Dipping of the Organizational Colors while at Present Arms -

Organizational Colors are dipped during the playing of the National Anthem, morning
and evening colors, ruffles and flourishes, General or Admiral’s March and gun
salutes. THE NATIONAL COLOR DOES NOT DIP. Dipping the color is executed on
the first note of the music by smartly extending the arm(s) to the front, lowering the
staff. It is terminated on the last note of the music or following the last round of the
gun salute by smartly raising the staff so the right thumb is directly in front of the chin
and the staff is inclined slightly to the front.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

129
f. Order Color from Present Color - The command is BABA, WATAWAT.
On the command of execution, WATAWAT, come to the position of Order Color as
previously described. The color guards execute arms on the command of Order
Arms.
g. Rests With the Color - The color bearer and color guards utilize the
position of Parade Rest in lieu of At Ease or Rest. The command is given only when
at Order Color, given by the senior color bearer or the Commander of the Color
Company (battalion). It is executed in one count. On the command of execution
PAHINGA, smartly place the left foot twelve inches to the left of the right foot, heels
on line, legs straight without stiffness, weight on both legs. At the same time, place
your left hand at the small of the back, just below the belt. The fingers are extended
and joined. The thumb is along the hand and the palm is to the rear. The elbow will
be on line with your body. Color guards execute Parade Rest as prescribed for the
manner in which they are armed. On the command of execution, HUMANDA, they
will resume the position of Order Color (Order Arms for the Color Guard).
RESTS WITH THE COLOR

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

130

h. Eyes Right (Left) from Order or Carry Colors - The command is TINGIN
SA KANAN (KALIWA), NA/ HANDA, KANANG (KALIWANG), TINGIN. It is
executed only when halted at Order Color or marching at Carry Color. The right (left)
man in the Color Guard or the National Color bearer, does not execute this
command.
i. While Halted at Order Color. On the command of execution, NA,

smartly turn the head and eyes to the right (left) 45 degrees.
EYES RIGHT
when at halt at Order Color
ii. While Marching at Carry Color. Both the preparatory

command and the command of execution will be given as the right (left) foot
strikes the deck. On the command of execution, TINGIN, turn the head and
eyes to the right (left) 45 degrees as the left (right) foot strikes the deck. If the
person being saluted is entitled to a salute by the organizational color, the
organizational color bearer also lowers the staff smartly to the front by
straightening the right arm.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

131
EYES RIGHT
while marching
i. Order or Carry Colors from Eyes Right (Left)
i. While Halted at Order Color- During a review, when the reviewing

officer troops the line, the command, HANDA, RAP, is not given. Each
member of the Color Guard executing Eyes Right (Left) will follow the
progress of the reviewing officer with his head and eyes until they are at the
front, at which time the movement is terminated.
ii. While Marching at Carry Color - The command is HANDA RAP.

Both the preparatory command and the command of execution will be given
as the left (right) foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, RAP,
smartly turn the head and eyes to the front as the right (left) foot strikes the
deck. If the organizational color bearer lowered the organizational color he will
smartly raise the staff up as he turns his head to the front.
5. MOVEMENT OF COLOR GUARD
To face the color guard to the right or left, the command is PIHIT SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD. It may be executed while halted, marking time or marching. On the
command of execution, KAD, with the right (left) flank man acting as a stationary
pivot, the Color Guard inclines to the right (left) until they face the new direction. To
face the Color Guard to the rear, the command is WATAWAT, PALIT LUNAN, and

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

132

KAD. It may be given while halted, marking time or marching. When marking time or
marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the deck. The Color Guard
then takes one more step at mark time, or forward, and then executes the following
movements:
a. The right flank color guard takes two steps forward, faces to the left
marching, taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the left marching,
and takes two steps in the new direction. He marks time until all are abreast.
b. The senior color bearer faces to the left marching, taking one full
step, and faces to the left while marking time. He marks time until all are
abreast.
c. The junior color bearer takes one step forward, faces to the right
marching, takes one full step and one step that places the left foot directly
beside the right, faces to the right marching and takes one step in the new
direction with the right foot. He then marks time until all are abreast.
d. The left flank color guard takes one step forward, faces to the right
as in marching, taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the right
marching, and takes one step in the new direction. He marks time until all are
abreast.
e. Upon completion of movement by the color guards, they mark time

until the senior color bearer commands, WATAWAT, HINTO or PASULONG,
KAD.
6. RECEIVING THE COLORS
a. The company is marched to the front of the Battalion Headquarters, in

column, and the Company Commander commands, BALANGAY, TO; BABA, TA;
HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP.
b. The Company Commander commands the Color Guard TANGGAPIN ANG

MGA WATAWAT.
c. The Color Guard marches within three paces from the Battalion Adjutant
and Sergeant Major, halts, and executes Order Arms upon the command of the
senior color bearer.
d. When the Adjutant is ready to deliver the Colors, the senior color bearer
orders TANGHAL, TA. On the command of execution, TA, the color bearers execute
Hand Salute.
e. The Adjutant steps to his left oblique and transfers the National Color to the
senior color bearer, who terminates his salute in time to receive the Color at the
position of Carry Color. The Adjutant then steps back to his original position and
salutes.
f. Upon the Adjutant’s salute, the Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique
and transfers the organizational color to the junior color bearer who has terminated

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

133
his salute with the senior color bearer. The junior color bearer receives the Color at
the position of Carry Color. The Sergeant Major then steps back to his original
position and salutes.
g. When the Sergeant Major salutes, the senior color bearer commands
BABA, TA. The Adjutant and Sergeant Major terminate their salutes as the Color
Guard executes Order Arms.
h. The Color Guard executes Carry Colors, and the senior color bearer then
marches the Color Guard to the Color Company.
i. The Color Guard approaches and halts 10 paces in front of and facing the
Company Commander. It then executes Order Color.
j. The Company Commander faces about and orders TANGHAL, TA, faces
about again, and salutes. The Color Guard executes TANGHAL, TA (Hand Salute if
armed with pistols) with the Company then the color bearer executes Carry Color.
k. The Company Commander terminates his salute, faces about and

commands BABA, TA; the Color Guard executes Order Color as the Company
terminates its Present Arms.
l. The Company Commander faces about and orders MGA WATAWAT,

SUMALUNAN. When the Color Company is in column, the post of the guard is six
paces behind it.
m.When the Color Company joins the battalion, the Color Guard takes its
appropriate post in the battalion formation. When the Color Battalion joins the
regiment, the Color Guard takes its appropriate post in the regimental formation.
n. When in formation, the Color Guard executes At Ease and rests with the
Color Company.
7. RETURNING THE COLORS
a. The company is halted in front of the Battalion Headquarters in line. The

company commander commands, BABA, TA; HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP.
b. The Company Commander gives the command, IRETIRO ANG MGA

WATAWAT.
c. The guard marches from his post and halts 10 paces in front facing the
Company Commander. They then execute Order Arms.
d. The company then executes Present Arms in the same manner previously
described.
e. The senior color bearer marches and halts the guard three paces in front of
the Adjutant and Sergeant Major, who have taken positions near the office or
quarters of the organizational commander in time to receive the colors. The guards
remain at Carry Colors.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

134

f. When the Color Guard halts, the Adjutant and Sergeant Major salute. The
Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique and receives the organizational color from
the junior color bearer. He then steps back to his original position.
g. When the Sergeant Major is back in his position, the adjutant step to his left
oblique and receives the National Color from the senior color bearer. He then steps
back to his original position.
h. When the Adjutant is in position, the senior color bearer commands,

TANGHAL, TA. On the command of execution, TA, the Adjutant and Sergeant Major
face about and march to the office or quarter of the Commanding Officer, where they
deposit the colors without further ceremony.
i. When the colors are out of sight or six paces away, the senior color bearer
commands BABA, TA and marches them back to the Color Company. The
Company Commander marches the company back to its area.

CHAPTER XII- COLORS

135

CHAPTER XIII
FLAG RAISING
AND RETREAT
CEREMONIES

CHAPTER XIII- FLAG RAISING AND RETREAT CEREMONIES

136
SECTION A
FLAG RAISING
Flag hoisting is a ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine flag when it is
used every Monday morning. The ceremony is conducted at the direction of the unit
commander. The commander sets the time for the flag hoisting. All members of the unit
shall be present during the conduct of the ceremony.
1. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
a. Formation of Troops
i. Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag hoisting time, the units are
formed in line formation facing the flagpole.
ii. Fifteen minutes before the appointed time, the siren shall be sounded
for 30 seconds to signal the start of the ceremony.
iii. The TC commands TIKAS, NGA.
b. Ceremony
i. The EMCEE starts the program with the cue “Now, the ceremony
begins.”
ii. The band plays ATTENTION CALL.
iii. The TC brings the troop to Attention, faces about and salutes to the GS
and says “Pinuno/Ginoo/Binibini, handa na po ang talupad para sa
seremonya ng pagbibigay pugay sa Pambansang Watawat ng Pilipinas”.
Once acknowledged, the EMCEE requests for the chaplain to lead an invocation.
iv. The Chaplain proceeds to the podium for the invocation. (The
command uncover/ ALIS KUPYA may be given once requested by the chaplain
or ordered by the commander)
v. After the prayer the TC commands PUGAY KAMAY. After the troops
have executed HAND SALUTE, he faces about and commands the same to his
staff.
vi. After the TC and his staff have executed hand salute, the National Flag
is hoisted simultaneously with the mass singing of the National Anthem led by a
designated member of the unit or by a band.
vii. After the National Anthem has been played, TC commands his staff
HANDA, RAP; faces about and directs the troops the same. Then TC commands
TAAS KANANG KAMAY, NA to the troop and then to his staff.
viii. A Senior NCO or a designated personnel leads the troops in the

“Panunumpa sa Watawat ng Pilipinas/ Panunumpa ng Lingkod Bayan sa Bagong
Milenyo.


137

ix. After the Panunumpa, TC brings his staff to attention, faces about
then commands HANDA, RAP and faces front.
x. Mass recitation of BFP Mission and Vision.
xi. If there is an invited Guess Speaker (GS) to deliver a message, he/ she
must be introduced by an officer of the same rank or two ranks lower, if the GS is
a uniformed officer. Civilian GS may be introduced by the head of the Host unit.
xii.Presentation of awards/token to the invited GS, then followed by

administrative announcements.
xiii. Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal/ BFP Hymn.
xiv. The TC performs HAND SALUTE to the GS and informs him that
the ceremony has been concluded, and requests permission to dismiss the
troops. (“Pinuno/Ginoo/Binibini, tapos na po ang seremonya ng pagbibigay
pugay sa Pambansang Watawat ng Pilipinas. Humihingi ng pahintulot
upang ilansag ang Talupad.”)
xv. Once acknowledged, the TC faces the troops and commands

LUMANSAG.
SECTION B
FLAG LOWERING/RETREAT
Retreat is a ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is lowered in the
evening. The term “Retreat” is taken from the French word “Retraite” and refers to
evening ceremony. The bugle sounded at retreat was used in the French army and
dates back to crusades. Retreat is sounded at sunset to notify sentries to start
challenging until sunrise, and to tell the rank and file to go to their quarters. To the Color
is being used as music honoring the flag as it is lowered in the evening.
1. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
a. The unit is formed facing the flag at least five (5) minutes before the time of
retreat. Commanders normally prescribe the time for the retreat.
b. As soon as the unit is formed, the TC takes his position facing the line of
troops and commands TALUPAD, DA and then TIKAS, NGA. Retreat is sounded at
this time.
c. After the Retreat is sounded, the TC, with his staff, executes Attention, faces
about and commands TALUPAD, DA then PUGAY KAMAY, NA. The TC then faces
about and executes Hand Salute with his staff. The band begins playing “To the Color”.
The flag is lowered simultaneously with the playing of To the Color. The lowering of the
flag must be done slowly.
d. After the last note of To the Colors, TC brings his staff to attention faces
about, and commands HANDA, RAP.
e. The TC will now face the troops and commands LUMANSAG.


139
CHAPTER XIV
CHANGE OF
COMMAND
CEREMONY

CHAPTER XIV- CHANGE OF COMMAND CEREMONY

140
SECTION A
CHANGE OF COMMAND
1. GENERAL RULES
A change of command is a ceremony held for the relinquishment and

assumption of a office, duties, responsibilities, and command. For a change of
command of a BFP key officer, either the DILG SECRETARY or the Chief, BFP,
shall be invited as the presiding officer. However, in their absence, any military
officer or civilian VIP duly designated shall act in their behalf.
The change of command of a major service command unit is normally

attended by its officer in charge or his duly designated representative as presiding
officer. On the other hand, that of a subordinate unit is attended by the commanding
general or representative of the next higher unit. Invited personalities entitled to
arrival/departure honors shall receive appropriate honors.
2. SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
a. Change of Command (Indoor)
i. Processional
ii. Entrance of Official Party
iii. Entrance of Colors
iv. National Anthem
v. Invocation
vi. Presentation of Award
vii. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
viii. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)
ix. Reading of Assumption of Command (Incoming)
x. Turnover of Command Symbol
xi. Remarks and Introduction to the Presiding Officer
xii. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)
xiii. Mass Singing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” or Unit’s Song/Hymm
xiv. Exit of Colors
xv. Exit of Official Party
xvi. Recessional
b. Change of Command in a Review
i. Entry of Troops
ii. Presentation and Honors
iii. Inspection
iv. Presentation of Awards
v. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
vi. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)
vii. Assumption of Command (Incoming)
viii. Turnover of Command Symbol
ix. Remarks and Introduction to the Presiding Officer
x. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)
xi. Pass in Review


141
c. Change of Command With a Review
i. Entry and Formation of Troops

ii. Presentation and Honors
iii. Inspection
iv. March-in-Review
v. Mass Formation (in front of the grandstand)
vi. Presentation of Awards
vii. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
viii. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)
ix. Assumption of Command (Incoming)
x. Turnover of Command Symbol
xi. Remarks and Introduction of the Presiding Officer
xii. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)
a. The EMCEE announces “We now begin the change of command

ceremony”.
b. The Adjutant proceeds to the left podium and reads the relief and
designation orders.
c. The Outgoing Commander proceeds to the right podium to make his

remarks. (He may direct the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA)
d. At the end of his remarks, the Outgoing Commander shall say, “I will now
read my relinquishment orders", then pauses for a few seconds. (At this point, if the
troop is at rest, the TC and his staff execute attention.) The TC faces the troop and
commands TALUPAD, DA. As soon as the troops are at attention, the Outgoing
Commander reads his relinquishment orders and signs, and then says, "I am ready
to be relieved.” He stays where he is. (If the Outgoing is at the time, a retiree, the
Outgoing officer then directs the ESFO, “National/Regional Executive Senior Fire
Officer __________, you can now lower my flag.”)
e. The Incoming Commander proceeds to the left podium and reads the
orders for his assumption of office and signs. He pauses for a few seconds, then
says, “I am ready to relieve you, sir.”
f. The Outgoing Commander and the Incoming Commander face each other.
Both commanders proceed to the center of the grandstand, halt and face the
Presiding Officer. The Presiding Officer stands and takes the center position in front
of the two commanders.
g. The Outgoing Commander salutes the Presiding Officer saying, “Sir, I
have relinquished the command of ____ effective this date.”
h. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute and says,

“Congratulations and well done.” They shake hands.
i. The Incoming Commander salutes and says “Sir, I have assumed the
command of ______effective this date.”


142
j. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute, then congratulates him,

saying, “Congratulations, take your post.”
k. At this point, the NESPO/ RESPO moves forward with the office command
symbol and hands it over to the Outgoing Commander. After handing over the
command symbol, the NESPO /RESPO moves to the other side near the Incoming
Commander.
l. The Outgoing Commander passes on the command symbol to the Presiding

Officer.
m. The Presiding Officer receives the command symbol and passes it on to

the Incoming Commander.
n. The Incoming Commander receives it and gives it back to the NESPO

/RESPO.
o. NESPO /RESPO Chief Petty Officer moves forward, takes hold of the
command symbol then exits.
p. The New Commander and the Former commander face each other. The
New Commander salutes the Former Commander. The latter acknowledges the
salute. (At this point, the audience may give a round of applause).
q. The Presiding Officer and the Former Commander take their seats, with the
Former Commander taking the seat of the New Commander. The New Commander
goes to the right podium and delivers his speech. (He may direct the troops to
TIKAS PAHINGA). The New Commander ends his speech with the statement “All
orders and instructions shall remain undisturbed until they are rescinded or
amended”. He pauses. (The troop commander commands TALUPAD, DA. If the
outgoing flag has been lowered, the New Commander then directs the ESFO,
“National/Regional Executive Senior Fire Officer __________, you can now
raise my flag.”)
r. The New Commander introduces the Presiding Officer.
s. The Presiding Officer delivers his remarks. (He may order the troops to
TIKAS PAHINGA.)
t. After the remarks is the Pass in Review, then the ceremony ends.


143
CHAPTER XV
OATH-TAKING
CEREMONY

CHAPTER XV- OATH-TAKING CEREMONY

144

SECTION A
OATH-TAKING CEREMONY
Oath taking may be a separate and distinct ceremony or integrated as a part
of a formal ceremony such as flag raising. A separate ceremony will follow the usual
sequence of a program while if the ceremony is integrated as part of a formal
ceremony, the sequence will be as follows;
1. OATHTAKING (INDOOR)
a As soon as the EMCEE announces that an Oath-taking Ceremony will take

place, the marcher of the group comes in front, faces the audience and says: MGA
TAONG MANUNUMPA, PUMAGITNA, KAD. The persons about to take their oath
rise from their seats and orderly form a line in front of the marcher facing the stage.
b The marcher faces about, salutes the person who will administer the oath
and reports: "Ginoo, ang mga taong manunumpa nandito na pong lahat".
c. The person who will administer the oath rises, acknowledges the salute,
proceeds to the podium and says: “Mangyaring itaas ang kanang kamay sa ayos
panunumpa at ulitin ang aking sasabihin”. After the last word are delivered, the
persons about to take their oath should mentally count one to three. The third count
will be for the raising of their right hand.
d. After the oath taking, on the last word of the person administering the oath,
the persons who swore should mentally count one to three. The third count will be
hands down. The administering officer may then shake hands with the oath takers.
(If oath takers are in mass, shaking hands may be waived. The sentence;
“Congratulations to all of you!” may do.) After which, the marcher again says: MGA
TAONG NANUMPA, SUMALUNAN, KAD. The oath takers go back to their seats
and sit down on the signal from the marcher.
e. The next number of the program follows.
2. OATHTAKING (OUTDOOR)
a. The oath takers are initially positioned opposite the TC and staff.
b. As soon as the emcee announces the oath taking, the marcher commands:
MGA TAONG MANUNUMPA, PASULONG, KAD. They march forward and stop
approximately six paces away from the TC.
c. The marcher salutes and reports to the troop commander: "Ginoo, ang
mga taong manunumpa narito pong lahat".
d. The troop commander acknowledges the salute and directs his staff to
march to the side. The person who will administer the oath goes to the rostrum and
says: "Mangyaring itaas ang kanang kamay sa ayos panunumpa at sumunod
sa akin". He then administers the oath.


145
e. After the oath taking, the VIPs shake hands with the oath takers. The
marcher then commands the oath takers to occupy their positions, which may be:
i. Designated seats in the grandstand; or
ii. A single line to the right of the troop commander and staff facing the
troops to witness the pass-in-review if there is any.


147
CHAPTER XVI
OPENING/
CLOSING AND
GRADUATION
CEREMONIES

CHAPTER XVI- OPENING/CLOSING AND GRADUATION CEREMONY

148

SECTION A
GENERAL INFORMATION
This section prescribes the standard procedures and sequences to be

adopted for the Course Opening/Closing and Ceremonies in the conduct of any unit
training.
1. DEFINITION OF TERMS
COURSE. This includes all courses, seminars and training conducted by

units.
PARTY. This includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities who
are supposed to have seats or places at the stage or similar places.
SECTION B
SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES
1. OPENING CEREMONY (INDOOR)
a. Processional. This part of the program marks the entry of the party. Here,
the students arise and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a
command may be necessary or any form of signal that may serve as a cue. The
party members, on the other hand, position themselves right in front of their
respective designated seats and remains standing facing the students.
b. Entrance of Colors. Colors to be used are the national color and unit
(training unit) color.
c. National Anthem (Mass singing). The cue when to start the singing of
National Anthem may be given by the one designated to lead and position
himself/herself at the middle before the students. After the singing, everybody
remains standing for the invocation.
d. Invocation. The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation proceeds to the podium/rostrum after the singing. After the invocation,
everybody will take his/her respective seats. Again pre-arrange signal shall be made
as a cue for everybody to sit at the same time.
e. Presentation of Students. Students shall be presented to the commander

or to his representative who has the authority to declare the opening of the course by
the School Commandant or by his authorized representative. The statement during
the presentation shall include the number of students, title of the course and the
recommended date of opening. The students rise upon presentation at a pre-
arranged cue.


149
f. Declaration of Opening of the Course. At this portion the Commander or
his authorized representative declares the course open. The moment the
Commander leaves the rostrum/podium, the students in coordinated movement sit
down.
g. Introduction of Keynote/Guest of Honor and Speaker. Everybody

remains seated when the guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest
speaker is presented, everybody rises.
h. Speech. Everybody remains standing unless told by the keynote/guest

speaker to sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rises with a round of
applause.
i. Presentation of Plaque to the Guest (if any). This portion is optional.
j. Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal/ Unit Hymm
k. Exit of Colors
l. Recessional. Exit of the party and program ends.
NOTE: The headgear shall not be taken off from invocation up to the end of
ceremony.
2. OPENING CEREMONY (OUTDOOR)
The sequences and procedures are the same except that there will be no
entrance and exit of colors. Colors will be placed at the ceremonial area and the
graduating class will be in mass formation.
3. GRADUATION CEREMONY (INDOOR)
a. Processional. This is the first part of the program, which marks the entry of
the party. Here, the students rise and stand at attention. The party members, upon
reaching the stage, will position themselves right in front of their respective
designated seats and remain standing.
b. Entrance of Colors. Colors to be used are the national color and unit
(training unit) color.
c. National Anthem. The cue when to start the singing of National Anthem
shall be given by the one designated to lead. After the singing, everybody remains
standing for the invocation.
d. Invocation. The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation approaches the podium/rostrum after the singing and proceeds with the
invocation. After the invocation, everybody takes their respective seats. A pre-
arranged signal will be made as a cue so that everybody will sit down at the same
time.


150

e. Presentation of Candidates for Graduation. The candidates for
graduation shall be presented by the School Commandant in the case of Major
Service Training Command/Center or by the training director/s for the In-service Unit
Training. The presentation statements shall include the number of candidates and
the course title among others. In this part, the candidates rise soon as they are
presented. Pre- arranged signal is needed in order to achieve a coordinated and
simultaneous movement.
f. Declaration of Graduates. The Commander or his authorized

representative, by virtue of his authority, declares the candidates for graduation as
graduates. Right after the declaration of graduates, the graduating class gives a
round of applause and then sits down.
g. Distribution of Certificates and Awards. The Adjutant or the

Administrative Officer reads the orders for those who will graduate, followed by the
giving of awards and certificates for outstanding students. The distribution of
certificates maybe given in bunch or individually and the sequence shall be at the
option of the school or unit concerned. The awards, however, shall be given and be
received individually.
h. Introduction of the Guest Speaker. Everybody will be seated while the

guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented,
everybody rises.
i. Speech. Everybody remains standing unless told by the guest speaker to

sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rises with a round of applause.
j. Mass Signing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” followed by Unit or School

Hymn, if any. The one designated to lead positions himself at the center in front of
the class. After the singing, he goes back to his place.
k. Exit of Colors.
l. Recessional. End of the program.
4. GRADUATION CEREMONY (OUTDOOR)
Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there are
no Entry and Exit of Colors. Colors are in place at the ceremonial area before the
start of the ceremonies.
5. OTHER DETAILS
a. Arrival Honors may be rendered to the Guest of Honor and Speaker who
are mostly VIP. It is genial gesture of ingenuity by the host to the GOHAS. This must
be inserted before the processional.
b. Parade and Review shall only be rendered during graduation in honor of

the graduating class and also of the Guest of Honor. The parade sequences and
procedures are similar with that of giving honors to awardees. The program proper is
conducted in such manner. However, there are modifications in the processional, the


151
playing of National Anthem, and the recessional. The processional is substituted with
the marching of the graduating class with the colors towards the grandstand being
led by the troop commander. In the recessional, the graduating class exits in the
manner and sequence at the option of the school or unit concerned.
c. Appropriate Authorized Representative of the Commander. Appropriate

person to act as authorized representative of the Commander or person to act in his
behalf to declare the opening or to declare the graduates are the Assistant or Deputy
Director, the Chief of the training Unit, his duly authorized staff their equivalent, in
that order.
d. Cue and Signal. A Cue or any form of signal, must be established to

achieve a coordinated and simultaneous execution by the graduates.


153
CHAPTER XVII
MILITARY
WEDDING

CHAPTER XVII- MILITARY WEDDING

154
SECTION A
BFP MILITARY WEDDING
The military wedding is like other weddings except for the following members
of the BFP in the bridal party are in uniform and the bride and groom usually leave
the chapel or church under the traditional arch of swords. Another difference is,
during the reception, the groom's sword will be used by the bride to cut the first piece
of cake. The uniform worn is in accordance with the kind of wedding, which was
planned by the concerned parties. Members of the BFP, however, usually wear
White Duck/Ceremonial Blue/ Mess Dress and gala during such occasion.
The arch of swords takes place on during the entrance of the entourage as
well as when the couple leaves the chapel or church. Only Commissioned Officers
(COs) are entitled to a draw sword for their wedding. Commissioned Officers and
cadets are authorized to participate in the sword ceremony. They have to be in
Ceremonial Blue Duck or in cadet’s gala uniform. Prior to the conduct of this,
however, approval/permission from the officiating chaplain or clergyman must be
sought especially when it is being done inside the chapel or church.
1. PLANNING THE WEDDING
The date and time of the wedding are decided by the couple, their parents
and some close relatives. Likewise, they decide on where the wedding ceremony
and the reception will take place. In planning the wedding, the following are to be
considered:
a. Religious Ceremonies
b. Parents
c. Best man for the groom
d. Maid of honor for the bride
e. Bouquet or corsage for the bride
f. Rings for the bride and groom
g. Wedding gown for the bride
h. Reception
i. Wedding trip
2. PREPARATION FOR THE WEDDING
a. The Chapel. The chapel is reserved on the first come, first served basis.
Permission for its use shall be obtained as soon as possible, in order to ensures the
desired date and hour for the wedding. Reservation for the chapel should be done by
the couple with the chapel authority at least one month prior to the scheduled date.
b. The Chaplain. As in the case of all weddings, it is important for the

engaged couple to consult their chaplain (clergyman) at least a month before the
schedule of the wedding. The chaplain will advise the couple concerning such
requirements as medical test, obtaining the marriage license and other requirements.
Although most chaplains refer to officiate in the chapel where he is assigned, a
clergyman from the couple's home church may assist the ceremony if this is


155
acceptable to the chaplain and is so arranged beforehand. The official chaplain
(clergyman) will be in accordance with the religious preference of the couple.
c. The Music. In conformity with the religious aspect of wedding ceremonies,

the pianist shall play traditional wedding music and selection from the library of
sacred music available in the chapel or church.
d. Flowers and Decorations. Flowers and decorations for the church may be
done by the church authorities. It may also be done by the concerned parties.
However, decoration which shall require alteration to the chapel or church or should
have prior clearance and approval by the chaplain (clergyman).
3. WEDDING ENTOURAGE
a. The entourage is normally composed of the following:
i. Sword Sponsor
ii. Groom with parents
iii. Ushers
iv. Best Man
v. Principal Sponsors
vi. Ring Bearer
vii. Coin Bearer
viii. Flower Girl/s
ix. Secondary Sponsors
x. Bride with Parents
xi. Maid of Honor
b. The bride and the groom may have one attendant each, this would be the
best man and the maid honor. The bride will ask the sister or a very close relative, or
an intimate friend, to be her maid of honor. The bride can also have bridesmaids.
Other members of the bridal attendant are the following: flower girls with the age of
4-7 years old, coin bearer and the ring bearer (4-5 years old).
c. Best Man. The groom chooses his best man and ushers from among his
closest friends or relatives. His best man may be a brother or an intimate friend. The
best man is bridegroom's aide. It is his duty to ensure the smooth administration of
the rites. Before the ceremony, the best man checks on the groom's uniform,
marriage license, wedding rings and swords. He checks what has to be signed, and
that everything is in order. He notifies the ushers to be at the chapel or church at
least twenty minutes before the ceremony and he will arrive with the groom to be
sure that the latter is not late and that he is properly dressed. Following the couple's
vow, the best man joins in the recessional in which he customarily escorts the maid
of honor. Afterwards, he may hurry on to the place of reception and check on details.
He does not stand in the receiving line at the reception, but is near the groom to be
of further help.
d. The Ushers. The ushers represent not only the groom but also the families
of the bride and groom as well. They act as unofficial host, greeting the guest in a
pleasant manner, and are escorts in the chapel, church and in the place of the
reception. When ushering, the Commissioned Officers who are members of the


156
ushers should not wear the swords. They may however, leave their swords at a
place convenient for the arch of sword (sabers) ceremony.
e. Secondary Sponsors. Secondary Sponsors are selected by the couple

from their close relatives and friends. Usually the secondary sponsors are composed
of three pairs and their duties are as follows:
i. Candle. The first pair is usually designated as the pair to light the
ii. Veil. The second pair is designated to pin the veil on the couple.
iii. Chord. The third group will put on the chord to the couple.
f. Principal Sponsors. The principal sponsors are selected persons usually

of the higher age bracket than that of the couple and coming from relatives, family
friends and senior officers of the BFP chosen by the couple. The main duty of the
principal sponsors is to act as secondary parents to the couple.
g. Sword Sponsors. The Sword Sponsors are selected officers of the BFP
usually composed of classmates of the groom; or cadets, to perform the arch of
swords. The sword sponsor is composed of a minimum of four (4) pairs and a
maximum of eight (8) pairs, depending upon the size of the chapel or church.
4. WEDDING CEREMONY
a. The Processional. Normally, the bridal entourage is arranged in the order

stated during the processional, however, it varies depending upon the couple and
church authorities:
i. Sword Sponsor
ii. Groom with parents
iii. Principal Sponsors
iv. Secondary Sponsors
v. Best Man
vi. Ushers and Bridesmaid/s
vii. Maid of Honor
viii. Ring Bearer
ix. Coin Bearer
x. Flower Girl/s
xi. Bride with Parents
b. As soon as the bridal entourage has been formed at a designated or

appropriate area in the vestibule as in (Figure 23), the Sword Sponsors march in
column of two's towards the altar with the most senior or designated commander,
giving the commands. When the elements reach the point, which is in line with the
first pew, the Commander commands, TILAP, TO. As soon as they are halted, the
Sword Sponsors automatically execute center face. They will then execute the saber
arch for the entrance of the bridal entourage. They maintain said formation until the
last element of the bridal entourage has passed and everyone has reached their
respective positions in the altar as in (Figure 24).


157
Figure 23. Designated/

appropriate area in the
vestibule.
Figure 24. Designated/

appropriate area in the
altar.


158
c. The groom who has been prepositioned near the altar waits for the bride.
When bride reaches the point between the groom and the maid of honor, she pauses
about three paces from the groom. The Swords Sponsor commander then
commands Carry Sword then PALABAS, RAP and marches off towards the
entrance of the chapel or church. Then the bride reaches groom's left arm. The
couple then proceeds to their designated seats. The chaplain then gives the signal
for the guests to take seats. The ceremony follows.
d. The Recessional. The Bride and the Groom are the first to leave the
chapel, with the Bride on the right side of the Groom. The Maid of Honor and the
Best Man walk out together, followed by the Bridesmaids and the ushers in pairs.
The recessional will be conducted in the order in Figure 25.
Figure 25. Recessional.
e. Arch of Swords (Sabers) Ceremony - Before the end of the ceremony,

the Sword Sponsors again form at the vicinity of the entrance of the chapel. They
march towards a designated area where the bridal entourage will form for the
recessional with the designated commander giving commands. Upon reaching the
designated point, the Sword Commander commands, TILAP, TO: The Sword
Sponsor halts and automatically executes center face. As soon as the Bride and
Groom and other members of the bridal entourage are ready for recessional, the
Sword Sponsor Commander commands, PALABAS, RAP first and then
PASULONG, KAD. The Sword Sponsor marches towards a designated area outside
the chapel or church where the arch of sword is to be conducted. Upon reaching the
area, the Sword Sponsor Commander then commands, TILAP, TO. The Sword
Sponsor halts and automatically executes center face. As soon as the Bride and the
Groom are approximately 6 paces before the first elements of the Sword Sponsor,
the Sword Commander commands, ANTABAY, BUNOT, KALIS. The Sword
Sponsor executes the command wherein each sword/saber bearer raises his right
arm with the sword/saber, rotating in a clockwise direction, so that the cutting edge
of the sword/saber will be on top, thus forming an arch with his opposite across the
aisle. As the Groom and Bride pass by a pair of Sword Sponsor, the swords of the


159
particular pair will be rotated with a snap and hitting each other's sword thereby
producing a sound. Afterwards that pair automatically executes Carry Sword. This
series of sword ceremonies is done up to the last pair of Sword Sponsors.
5. WEDDING RECEPTIONS
a. The type of reception as well as the number of guest to be invited depends

upon the choice of the couple. A reception may be held at home, in the officer's club
at a hotel or other similar places, which the couple may select.
b. A receiving line may also be formed at the entrance of the place of

reception. To greet the bridal party, one offers something like the following "Best
Wishes to the Bride and Congratulations to the Bridegroom".
c. Seating arrangement. A presidential table is always prepared in the

reception area. Usually, the Groom and Bride, Principal Sponsors, Chaplain or
Clergyman and the Parents are seated at the presidential table.


161
CHAPTER XVIII
WREATH-LAYING
CEREMONY

CHAPTER XVIII- WREATH-LAYING CEREMONY

162

SECTION A
WREATH-LAYING CEREMONY
Wreath-laying has a historical function that immortalizes great men, events
and places. This activity is usually given by visiting dignitaries, ranking government
and military official to pay tribute, homage and respect to a particular place or person
on significant occasions and dates that are of great importance to a history or
person. This is usually done at the following places, to wit:
a. Rizal Monument
b. Libingan ng mga Bayani
c. Bonifacio Monument
d. Aguinaldo Shrine
e. Corregidor Shrine
f. Tejeros Convention Marker
g. Dambana ng Kagitingan
h. Other National Shrine and Sites
1. ORGANIZATION
The ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:
a. Escort of Honor of thirty-six (36) men (or as the space area warrants) with
one (1) Fire Senior Inspector (SINSP) or Inspector (INSP) as Escort Commander
and one (1) guidon bearer.
b. Two (2) wreath bearers or more (in even numbers) depending on the
number of wreaths to be laid.
c. Firing Party twenty-one (21) men (3 x 7) with Firing Commander.
d. Band of at least twenty-five (25) members with conductor. A drummer and

three (3) buglers will be made as part of the band.
e. Two (2) color bearers for the National and Unit colors, and two (2) color
guards.
2. FORMATION OF TROOPS (WREATH FORMATION)
a. The members of the Escort of Honor form at both sides of the path where
the Guest of Honor and Host will walk towards Point 4 (where the wreath is to be
laid) facing each other and maintaining proper interval between each other. The
Escort Commander and the guidon bearer behind him position themselves
approximately six (6) paces to the front of the marker (Point 2) where the Guest of
Honor and the Host will stand for the ceremony.
b. The National and the Unit color bearers and guards are prepositioned on
both sides of the tomb, monument or shrine with the National Color at the right side.


163
c. The Firing Party is formed approximately ten (10) paces to the right of the
monument, tomb or shrine.
d. The wreath detail position themselves at a point in the path to assist the
GOH in bringing the wreath to Point 4.
e. The band is formed at the vicinity to the right of the Escort Commander or
as the area dictates.
Figure 26. Wreath-

Laying Ceremony.
3. PROCEDURE
a. The GOH alights from his car at Point 1 where he will be met by the Host.
(If the Host is riding in a car with guest of honor(s), both will alight at the same point).
At this time, the ceremonial troops are brought to attention by the Escort
Commander.
b. The Host escorts the GOH to Point 2. In accordance with the protocol
requirement, the Host stays at the left side of the GOH. Other guests stay behind
them.
c. As soon as the GOH and the Host have occupied their respective positions
at Point 2, the Escort Commander faces the troops and commands TANGHAL, TA.
He assumes his original position, as the guidon bearer executes the appropriate
salute.
d. The Band plays the National Anthem of the GOH (if he is head of the state
or ambassador) followed by the Philippine National Anthem. If the GOH is not a
head of the state or ambassador, only the Philippine National Anthem will be played.


164

e. After the National Anthem has been played, the Escort Commander
together with the guidon bearer executes HANDA HARAP. He faces the troops and
commands; HANDA, RAP. He faces about, salutes and says, "Ginoo, handa na po
ang pag-aalay". The Escort Commander together with this goes to the side giving
way to the GOH and Host.
NOTE: In cases were there are more than one wreath-layers, the most junior will lay
the wreath first.
f. The wreath bearers will command DAMPOT BULAKLAK, NA and

positions themselves in front of the GOH and Host. Then Band plays the Pilipinas
Kong Mahal.
g. At the first note of the music, the Host invites the GOH to move forward.
h. Simultaneously, the wreath bearers Proceeds to Point 4 followed by the

GOH and the Host. Other guests remain in their positions at Point 2. At this instance,
the drummer and three (3) buglers who are initially with the band, position
themselves near the monument.
i. When the Honoree and Host reaches Point 3, the Host stops. The GOH and
the Wreath bearers continue walking until they reach Point 4.
NOTE: The movement from Point 2 to Point 4 should be completed to coincide with
the last note of the Pilipinas Kong Mahal.
j. The GOH assisted by the wreath bearers, lays the wreath then steps back
to Point 4. Wreath bearers salute the monument then face about and occupy their
respective positions at both sides of the monument.
k. At this instance, Escort Commander commands TANGHAL, TA. The escort

Commander together with the guidon bearers, executes hand salute.
l. Drummers sound four (4) ruffled drums. Everybody in the area renders
appropriate respect/salute.
m. After the ruffle drums have been sounded, the firing party fires three
volleys then the bugler sounds the TAPS. If the flower drop is added in the
ceremony, petals are dropped after the sounding of TAPS.
n. At the last note of TAPS, Escort Commander and the guidon bearer
executes HANDA HARAP. He commands the troops HANDA, RAP.
o. The Band plays Sampaguita while GOH moves from Point 4 to Point 3
where he will be joined by the Host.
p. From Point 3, the GOH and Host goes back to Point 2. The band ceases
playing the music as soon as the GOH and the Host have occupied their original
positions at Point 2. Escort Commander with guidon bearer move to their original
positions at Point 2. Escort Commander executes about face and commands
PUGAY KAMAY. He again executes about face and together with the guidon bearer
they execute present arms.


165
q. After the Honoree has acknowledged the salute, the Escort Commander
and the guidon bearer execute order arms. The Escort Commander then faces about
and commands HANDA, RAP. Again he faces about and executes hand salute to
the GOH and says "Tapos na po ang pag-aalay" (Sir, that ends the ceremony).
r. The GOH acknowledges his salute. . The GOH and the Host face each
other. The Host will render appropriate respect/salute and exchange pleasantries
with the GOH.
4. PROCEDURE FOR THREE VOLLEYS OF FIRE
On the third and fourth drum ruffles, the Firing party commander commands
HARAP SA KANAN, RAP and AGAP, TA respectively. After the fourth drum ruffle,
the firing party commander will command HANDA, SIPAT, TOK. After the last word
of the preparatory command SIPAT, the first squad firers aim their rifles 45 degrees
upward and to the left. Simultaneously, their left foot will move one foot forward to
the direction of their rifles. At the command of execution TOK, firers must pull the
trigger at the same time. The second and third squads will do the same as the firing
party commander dictates.


167
CHAPTER XIX
FUNERAL
HONORS
AND SERVICES

CHAPTER XIX- FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES

168

SECTION A
GENERAL INFORMATION
1. PURPOSE
Funeral Honors is accorded to a departed individual or group of BFP

Uniformed Personnel entitled to a final tribute and honors. It may be rendered in
any designated vigil and interment sites.
a. Deceased Persons Entitled to Funeral Honors:
i. BFP personnel who died while in the active service;

ii. Retired BFP/PC/INP personnel (former PC/INP) personnel
who opted to join the BFP after the enactment of R.A.
6975; and
iii. BFP personnel honorably separated from BFP service.
b. Courtesies that may be rendered as part of Funeral Honors
i. Vigil Guards;
ii. Escort and Transportation Services;
iii. Funeral/Necrological Services at the BFP Chapel or
preferred vigil sites; and
iv. Burial/Graveside Service (Mass) by the BFP
Chaplain/Clergy
2. DEFINITION OF TERMS
BFP GALA UNIFORM. This refer to one of the highest form of uniforms of
BFP personnel i.e. Blue Duck
BFP PERSONNEL WHO DIED WHILE IN THE ACTIVE SERVICE. This

includes BFP Personnel who died in line of duty by reason of his office/position; died
due to events that causes a gradual deterioration from a healthy state;
ESCORT AND TRANSPORTATION. This shall be provided by the office of

the Provincial Fire Marshal/District Fire Marshal upon request of heirs or nearest
relatives of the deceased.
FAREWELL OR SLOW MARCH. It is when the casket is then removed from

the hearse or fire truck and carried to the gravesite.
FLORIST. This refers to persons who make special flower arrangements as

may be called upon for a firefighter funeral
FUNERAL SERVICE AND HONORS. Departed BFP members and retirees

are given vigil, flag cover during the wake, necrological services and graveside
honors as a gesture of farewell by sounding of sirens and nozzle/turret showers in an
appropriate time during internment.


169
GRAVESIDE SERVICES. These include the farewell march and salute,
clergy, pallbearers, firing party and buglers.
HEARSE. It is a vehicle for conveying the dead to the grave.
HONORABLY SEPARATED FROM BFP SERVICE. Personnel who died in

the service in good standing
INTERMENT AT LIBINGAN NG MGA BAYANI . For those who may be

entitled to Interment at Libingan ng mga Bayani.
INTERMENT FLAG. The interment flag is used to cover the casket of the
deceased. The white part with the sun and stars shall cover the head of the casket.
The blue portion is to the right and the red part to the left of the deceased with both
colors lowered in the grave. No wreath of flowers should be placed on top of the flag
shrouded casket. Nonetheless, a small cross of flowers may be placed over the flag
as a symbol of “God above the country”. Issue of one interment flag to heirs of
deceased fire retiree is authorized.
LIE-IN-STATE AT BFP/NFTI CHAPEL. Before the actual funeral, a deceased

may lie-in-state at a BFP/NFTI Chapel provided such service does not interfere with
regularly scheduled church services of said chapel. However, it shall be the BFP
Chaplain/Clergydirectly in charge of the chapel who shall make the necessary
arrangement for the deceased personnel authorized to lie-in-state in BFP Chapel.
OFFICER PRIMARY RESPONSIBLE (OPR)s. Local Officer Primary

Responsible (OPR)s play a major role in the funeral-planning process. They should
be made aware of the existence of any established departmental funeral policies or
traditional guidelines.
TAPS. The traditional lights out musical composition played at military

funerals and memorials. The official version of Taps is played by a single bugle.
VIGIL GUARDS. The sentries posted to keep watch on the bier when remains
of a deceased are lying in state.
3. INVENTORY OF NECESSARY EQUIPMENT FOR FUNERAL
The following is a list of supplies that may be needed during a funeral service
and/or mourning period. These may be kept on hand in the fire station stockroom:
• Color guard standards (Station Flag)

• Interment Flag
• Black 3/4" plastic tape or elastic bands; and round-tipped scissors
• Black bunting
• White gloves
• Fire trucks (as hearse and for the conduct of water/turret shower)
• 21 Gun salute
• Band (Drummer and a Bugler)
• Others


170

4. COMPOSITION OF FUNERAL HONORS CONTINGENT
a. For deceased active BFP uniformed personnel who died in line of duty or
deceased retired BFP/former PC/INP uniformed personnel, they shall be entitled
to a full funeral honors which shall be composed of the following:
i. 1 platoon Honor Guards

ii. Ceremonial Band (may be the selected members only e.g. snare
drummer, bugler etc.)
iii. Colors
iv. Pall bearers
v. Firing party
b. The Commander of a Funeral Escort will be as follows:
i. Of the President or an ex-President: as directed by the Secretary,

DILG.
ii. Of the Secretary of DILG/Chairman, NAPOLCOM as directed by
Vice-Chairman, NAPOLCOM.
iii. Of the Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order as directed by
the Secretary of DILG/Chairman
iv. Of the C,BFP or a former Chief BFP: as directed by the Secretary
of DILG
v. Of an officer: an officer of the ,same grade; if non such be present,
as directed by the unit/office Director/Supervisor.
vi. Of a cadet: a cadet of the same class.
vii. Of a non-commissioned officer of one of the first three grades: by
a fire non-commissioned officer of the highest grade available
c. Funeral Escorts. The following guidelines will govern the composition of

funeral escorts, however, local commanders may vary the composition as maybe
appropriate to suit local situations:
i. One Squad - BFP Non Commissioned Officer from FO1 to SFO1

ii. Two Squads- BFP Non- Commissioned officer from SFO2 to SFO4
iii. One Platoon - INSP to SINSP
iv. One Company with 2 Platoons – CINSP to SSUPT
v. One Company of 2 or 3 Platoons - BFP Flag Officer, and Civilian
entitled to a gun Salute from 13 to 19 guns
vi. Brigade Size of 3 Battalions – C,BFP (Active and Retired)


171
SECTION B
CONDUCT OF FUNERAL HONORS
1. PROCEDURES
a. Funeral honors of deceased active BFP personnel shall be provided by

his/her unit of assignment or the unit which has jurisdiction over the place where
the deceased will lie-in-state or to be interred.
b. Funeral honors of deceased retired PC/INP and BFP personnel shall be

provided by the unit which has jurisdiction over the place where the deceased will
lie-in-state or to be interred.
c. Uniform of funeral honor guards shall be in gala uniform regardless of

rank of the deceased as a tribute and last respect for his/her services to the
nation.
d. The Fire Marshal of the last unit assignment of the deceased shall ensure
the necessary coordination and implementation of the funeral honors and services.
However, for deceased retired personnel, the unit which has jurisdiction over
the place where the deceased will lie-in-state or will be interred (whichever
is applicable) shall provide the necessary funeral honors and services upon
request of the family of the deceased.
e. The Fire Marshal concerned shall immediately direct the Survivorship

Officer to coordinate with the family of the deceased active personnel to
determine and work for the funeral honors and services in line with the BFP
customs and traditions;
f. It is the duty of the Survivorship Officer through the Fire Marshal to inform
the Regional Director thru channel regarding the death of an active and retired
personnel within his/her jurisdiction.
g. In the planning for the Funeral Honors, the family must be consulted. Their
wishes outweigh the traditions of the BFP. It is vital that all options for honoring the
fallen BFP personnel be presented to the survivors. They need to know not only
what should be done (according to tradition), or what has always been done, but
also what can be done to memorialize their loved one. Therefore, the decision of the
family prevails.
h. The family can select only those elements of the service they wish to have
included. For example, tradition might call for a gun salute to be offered at the
cemetery; the family may decline because the sound of gunfire would be too
traumatic. A “21 Bells” ceremony or turret shower can be alternative options. The
survivors should understand the options presented but not be pressured into
including any tradition. Again, the decision of the family prevails.
i. The decision of placing the casket on the fire truck is given to the family
depending on the availability of fire apparatus in the area.


172

j. While travelling from the place of wake to the church and to the cemetery,
should the funeral procession pass by any fire station, it is suggested that BFP
personnel be standing in front of the station as it passes, saluting the fallen BFP
personnel and the family. The salute is held until the procession has passed and
then released slowly to signify the last farewell to a comrade.
k. The fire apparatus that will be utilized for the funeral honors shall be
provided by the fire station concerned and adjacent stations as may be deemed
necessary upon the discretion of the Provincial/ District Fire Marshal.
l. Coordination with other uniformed counterpart agencies may be resorted

by the BFP Fire Marshal concerned for the 21 Gun Salute and Band (for the
procession, honors and playing of TAPS).
m. A funeral honors expenses/budgetary requirements are hereby proposed

to be subjected for further study by the concerned Offices in the National Office
subject to existing laws and policies.
2. DRAPING OF THE FLAG AND

VIGIL PROCEDURES DURING THE WAKE
a. Covering the Casket with the Philippine Flag
The national flag may be used to cover the caskets of the honored dead, as
recognized by the state. When positioning the flag, the white triangle must be at the
head of the casket, while the blue field must cover the right side. To prevent the flag
from falling off, a black band may be wrapped along the side of the casket.
b. Initial Position of the Participating Elements
A color officer shall position on the left side of the Flag bearer with two vigil
guards on extreme right and left. The flag folded as in triangle with star up at the
center pointing towards the casket.
NOTE: Number of vigil guards reduced to one depending upon the availability
of personnel and space at the vigil site.


173
c. Start of the Ceremony
i. Officer gives the command of TILAP, DA.
ii. Officer gives the command of PASULONG, KAD.
iii. Officer gives the command TILAP, TO one meter away from the
casket.
iv. Officer gives the command PUGAY KAMAY, NA (Minimum of

2-3 seconds) and then command HANDA, RAP.
v. The Flag bearer and the color officer move near the casket and
unfold the flag and drape the flag on the casket starting from a half of the
lower portion of the deceased with the blue color on the right side of the
deceased and the red on the left side while the vigil guards remain in
attention.
The color officer and the color bearer must see to it that the flag is
properly draped on the top of the casket of the deceased and it should not
touch the floor. Nothing should be placed on top of the flag except religious
images.
The headgear of the deceased BFP personnel/Retiree shall be

placed on the edge of the flag (glass portion) almost at navel portion of the
deceased facing front.
vi. After placing the cap, the color officer will give the command
of about face or HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP, moves two steps forward then
about face again to align with the vigil guards. Once they are aligned, the
color will give the command of PUGAY KAMAY, NA (about 3 seconds)
and then command HANDA, RAP. The Color Officer and the Color bearer
will execute about face then PASULONG, KAD for the exit.
vii. The vigil guards on the right will give the command of HARAP
SA GITNA, RAP and then command TIKAS PAHINGA.
d. Viewing of the Deceased
When a guest/mourner comes to view the deceased, the vigil guards will
automatically stand at attention and will remain on that position until the
guest/mourner leaves the place.
NOTE: The position of the vigil guards should be aligned to both edges of the
casket at approximate distance of 1 to 1½ meter.
e. Changing of Vigil Guards
Rotation of vigil guards is every 15-30 minutes. Incoming vigil guards stand at
attention at the isle facing the casket before marching to the location of the ongoing
vigil guards who are in parade rest or TIKAS PAHINGA.


174

The incoming vigil guards on the right will command PASULONG, KAD and
stop in front of the outgoing vigil guards. The outgoing vigil guards come to attention
before the incoming vigil guards reach their location by giving the command of
TILAP, DA. The incoming vigil guards on the right will give the command PUGAY
KAMAY, NA and after about 3 seconds give the command HANDA, RAP. The
incoming vigil guards on the right will command HARAP SA LABAS, RAP then
PUGAY KAMAY, NA the same as with the outgoing vigil guards then HANDA,
RAP. After which, the outgoing vigil guards at the right give the command HARAP
SA LABAS, RAP then PASULONG, KAD for the exit. The incoming vigil guards
move one step forward then about face and then TIKAS PAHINGA taking
command from the vigil guard on the right.
f. Vigil Guard Movement before and after the Necrological

Service/Sacred Mass at the Wake
i. Before the start of the necrological service/mass, the vigil

guards will exit from their location to avoid disruption during the necrological
service/mass. The vigil guards on the right will give the command of
attention TILAP, DA, faces center HARAP SA GITNA, RAP, move one step
forward DALAWANG HAKBANG PASULONG, then faces center HARAP
SA GITNA, RAP. They will execute PUGAY KAMAY, NA, after 2 to 3
seconds in duration, the HANDA, RAP then faces HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP,
then LAKAD PASULONG, KAD for the exit.
ii. After necrological service/mass, the vigil guards will position

at attention, move forward and stop one meter away from the casket then
execute HARAP SA LABAS, NA one step forward then about face and then
TIKAS PAHINGA, NA taking order from the vigil guards on the right.
3. NECROLOGICAL SERVICE
The following suggested order of events would be appropriate for a formal,

full-honors funeral.
First, the honor guard escorts the family to the staging area, meeting up with
the casket. The chief is advised to start the ceremony. At this point, the honor guard
(casket detail, pallbearers) performs its duties. They accompany the casket to its
place of honor, and the Color Guard presents the colors.
After the ceremony, the funeral service itself begins. Following is an example
of the order of events for a religious service:
a. Invocation
b. Opening remarks/greetings
c. Special music
d. Scripture reading/clergy remarks
e. Speakers/ Eulogy
a. BFP Officials (Co-workers)
b. Family representative(s)
c. Fraternal Organization/Classmates
d. Friends


175
f. Special music
g. Presentations
h. Closing remarks/prayer
The honor guard’s duties continue during the procession to the cemetery and
the interment, with each department following its own procedures.
4. MOVING OUT OF THE DECEASED PERSONNEL FROM WAKE PLACE
a. The vigil guards on the right will give the command of attention, face
center, move one step forward, then face center. They will execute, PUGAY
KAMAY, NA, after two or three seconds execute HANDA, RAP then about face
and command PASULONG, KAD for the exit.
b. Assigned pallbearers will form a column of two with four personnel

each column. The most senior officer will command PASULONG, KAD and stop
about one meter away from the casket.
c. The pallbearers on the front will move forward near the casket to close it
then move the flag to cover the casket. The three pallbearers on the left side move
to the red portion of the flag passing through the side of the head of the deceased
while the pallbearer on the right column will move to the blue portion of the flag
taking command from the front outer right pallbearer who gives the order of
“PASULONG, KAD.” The right portion pallbearer particularly the 2nd and 3rd
element will align to the blue color of the flag. They will automatically face center
to the casket upon reaching their designated location/position taking cue particularly
from the left side pallbearer (red flag portion).
d. The right portion pallbearers will hold the casket with their left hand and
left portion pall bearer with the right hand. They will lift the casket and move out
from the place with the deceased feet moving ahead.
5. DEPARTURE HONORS
i. Honor Guard Commander (HGC) should position himself at the center

near the feet of the deceased about 3 meters or 8 paces while the pallbearers are
facing the casket.
ii. The HGC before the start of the Honors Ceremony must see to it that
the immediate family members of the deceased shall position himself or herself
near the portion of the casket (one meter distance). The host or HGC of the
deceased shall be at right side portion of the immediate family members
(wife/husband) of the deceased while other family members should be positioned
behind them.
iii. The HGC shall say “Ready Sir” signaling the start of the ceremony.
He will execute about face to give command to the Troops PUGAY
KAMAY, NA then faces about and commands his staff PUGAY KAMAY, NA.


176

iv. The band plays ruffles and flourishes followed by appropriate music.
(Refer to Entitlement to Honors i.e. gun salute (if necessary), no. of ruffles and
flourishes, music, size of honor guard elements, honor guard commander and host)
v. At the last note of the music, honor guard commander bring his staff to
attention then faces about, commands to the troop HANDA, RAP.
vi. The honor guard Commander shall give signal to the pallbearer by
saying, “Sir, you may place the casket to the hearse/fire truck.”
vii. In moving the casket, the feet of the deceased shall come first until such
time it is about to be placed in the hearse/fire truck, that the head of the
deceased shall come or enter first.
NOTE: The flag shall not be removed during the movement and transfer of the
deceased to any place until the playing of TAPs at the gravesite.
6. PROCESSION OF THE DECEASED
a. The procession is formed in the following order (if walking):
i. Escort commander;
ii. Band;
iii. Escort (including colors, firing party, and bugler);
iv. Honorary pallbearers;
v. Clergy;
vi. Hearse or fire truck, and honorary pallbearers;
vii. Active pallbearers;
viii. Personal color (if appropriate);
ix. Family; and
x. Friends and patriotic or fraternal organization.
b. The procession is formed in the following order (if riding):
i. Fire truck as Lead Apparatus

ii. Hearse or Fire truck
iii. Family Car
iv. Pallbearers
v. Funeral Detail Car
vi. Fire Marshal and BFP Officers
vii. BFP Personnel
viii. Dignitary
ix. Friends and Patriotic or Fraternal Organization
c. When the participants for the procession have been formed, the Escort
Commander commands PASULONG, KAD to the band and escort. The elements in
the rear conform. The procession marches slowly to solemn music (cadence of
100 beats per minute). When there is considerable distance from the chapel,
may march in quick time. The band plays appropriate music throughout the march.
Care must be exercised to avoid disturbing other funeral processions of service that
may be passed on the route of the march. When escort is in the vicinity of
the grave, it resumes a slow cadence to solemn music. Customary music is used.


177
d. When the participants for the procession are riding cars, only the farewell
march and salute will be conducted in the graveside.
7. FUNERAL PROCEDURES WITH CHAPEL SERVICE
a. Entrance to the Chapel
i. Before the beginning of the service, the funeral escort is formed in

line facing the chapel. The band forms on the left flank of the funeral escorts
facing the chapel.
ii. Members of the immediate family, relatives, and friends of the

deceased are requested to enter the chapel and be seated before the
casket is taken in. Members of the immediate family and relatives occupy
seats to the right front of the chapel.
iii. The hearse/fire truck bearing the remains should be taken in front
of the chapel few moments before the time set of the service. As the
hearse/fire truck approaches, the escort commander command, MGA
GABAY, DA and he salutes until the hearse/fire truck stops in front of the
chapel. When the casket is ready to be moved into the chapel, the
commander of the escort gives the command PUGAY KAMAY, NA, then the
band renders the honors, and if appropriate, followed by the hymn. At the
note of the hymn, the casket is moved from the hearse/fire truck by the active
pallbearers, and carried between the ranks of honorary pallb e a r e r s , if
any, into the chapel. The remains are handled in a dignified and reverent
manner, ensuring that the casket is carried level and feet first at all times. As
soon as the casket enters the chapel, the band ceases to play, and the
escort commander brings the escort to attention and then TIKAS PAHINGA.
iv. When honorary pall bearers are present, they shall be formed in
two ranks, each one facing the other, in order of seniority, with the most
senior being the closest to the hearse/fire truck, thus forming an aisle from the
hearse/fire truck to the entrance of the chapel. At the first note of the music
and while the casket is being borne between the ranks of honorary pallbearer,
they uncover or salute. They then follow the casket in column of twos and
occupy seats at the left portion of the chapel.
v. When the casket has been placed on the hearse or fire truck,
two active pall bearers shall push the hearse or fire truck to the front of the
church while the other active pall bearer move to the vestibule and await
the termination of the church service. If there is no such hearse or fire truck,
the active pall bearers carry the casket to the front of the church as instructed
by the chaplain before the service. When no honorary pallbearers are used,
and if desired by the family, active pallbearer may occupy the seats to the left
front of the chapel.
b. Moving out from the Chapel
i. After the chapel service, the honorary pall bearers (if present)
precede the casket in column of twos as the two active pall bearers guide the


178

hearse/fire truck to the entrance of the chapel. The honorary pall bearers
again form an aisle from the entrance of the chapel to the hearse/fire truck
with the most senior closest to the chapel. They uncover or salute as
prescribed. When the casket has been placed in the hearse/fire truck, the
honorary pall bearers enter their vehicles. When marching, the honorary pall
bearer for column on each side of the hearse/fire truck, the leading member
of each column stand parallel at the front wheels of the hearse/fire truck.
ii. The casket, followed by the family group, is moved to the

entrance immediately behind the honorary pall bearers. As soon as the
active pallbearers carry the casket to the hearse/fire truck and form column of
twos behind it, the honorary pall bearers march. If the honorary pall bearers
do not march, the active pall bearers form files on each side of the hearse/fire
truck, the leading members of each column opposite the front wheels of
the hearse/fire truck. The family group remains at the chapel entrance until
the honorary pallbearers have broken ranks to enter their vehicles or have
taken their positions for marching. The members of the family group then are
guided to their vehicles.
iii. As the casket approaches the entrance of the chapel at the

conclusion of the service, the funeral escort and band repeat the procedure as
prescribed for entering the chapel. When the casket has been secured into
the hearse/fire truck, the band ceases playing and the escort is brought to the
order.
8. GRAVESITE SERVICE
All elements of a firefighter funeral must be present. However, if troops

are not conveniently available, or if the family desires to eliminate other elements,
the following must be used:
a. Clergy
b. Officer-in-Charge or Fire Non-Commissioned Officer-in-Charge,
appropriate to the grave of the deceased
c. Active pallbearers
d. Firing party (if appropriate)
e. Drummer and Bugler
f. Personal color bearer (if appropriate)
NOTE: These elements are positioned at the graveside before the arrival of the
remains.
a. Arrival at the Gravesite
i. As the procession arrived at the cemetery, the siren on the fire

truck is sounded to call all who are at the graveside to attention and
prepare the BFP personnel for the farewell march. The marching
elements move directly to their pre-designated positions. The band and BFP
escort are formed in line in view of the next of kin. The other marching
elements are halted as near as practicable to the grave. The firing party is


179
positioned so that it fires over the grave before the casket is removed from
hearse/fire truck.
ii. Before the hearse/fire truck is halted, the honorary pallbearers are
formed in two ranks, the most senior closest to the hearse/fire truck, forming
an aisle extending from the hearse/fire truck toward the grave. When the
grave is near to the road to permit this formation, they take their position at
the grave before the casket is removed from the hearse/fire truck.
iii. When the casket is ready to be moved from the hearse/fire

truck, the escort commander commands “PUGAY KAMAY, NA”. At the
command of execution NA, the escort executes hand salute and the band
renders honors, if appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the first note of the
hymn, the active pallbearers remove the casket from the hearse/fire truck.
iv. After the casket was emplaced to its truck, the escort commander
commands “HANDA, RAP”. Then, last viewing and benediction from the BFP
Chaplain/Clergy immediately follows.
v. When casket is about to be buried, the escort commander

commands “PUGAY KAMAY, NA”, followed by sounding of siren of the fire
truck and at the same time the turret or water shower for one (1) minute, the
firing of twenty-one (21) gun salutes (if appropriate) and playing of TAPS by
the drummer and bugler, after which, the escort commander commands
“HANDA, RAP”. The band renders, if appropriate the Alma matter hymn.
b. Ceremonial Firing (Coordination with the PNP or BJMP shall be made

if necessary)
For a ceremonial firing, the firing party consists of not more than
seven PNP or BJMP personnel but not less than five with one Police/Jail Non-
Commissioned Officer-in-Charge.
The firing party is normally pre-positioned at the grave site and

facing in the direction that allows it to fire directly over the grave. However,
care should be taken to ensure the rifles are fired at 45-degree angle from
horizontal.
To Load the Magazines or Clips:
i. Magazines or clips are loaded with three rounds and blank

adapters are attached before forming the firing party.
ii. At the conclusion of the religious service or on the

Escort Commander’s Command, the Police/Jail Non-Commissioned
Officer-in-Charge directs the loading of blank ammunition. At the
command of “MAGPYUNGLO”, each rifleman executes port arms,
faces to the half right, and moves his right foot 10 inches to the
right to a position that gives him a firm, steady stances. He then
chambers one round of ammunition, places the weapon in the position,
and resume port arms.


180

To Fire by Volley:
i. When the riflemen have completed the movements and

weapons are locked, the commands are HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK. At
the command HANDA, each rifleman moves the safety to the fire
position. On the command SIPAT, the rifle is shouldered with both
hands to the muzzle to the front of an angle of 45 degrees from the
horizon. On the command of execution PUTOK, the trigger is
squeezed quickly and the weapon is immediately returned to port arms.
ii. To continue the firing weapon that function automatically

(blank adapter), the commands SIPAT and PUTOK are given and
executed as previously prescribed. To continue the firing with weapon
that must be manually operated chamber another round (with blank
adapters), the commands, HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK are again given.
On the command HANDA, each rifleman manually chambers the next
round. The commands SIPAT and PUTOK are given and executed as
previously prescribed.
iii. When the third round has been fired and the riflemen have
resumed port arms, the riflemen immediately place the weapons on
safe and assume the Position of Attention (at port arms), and face to
halt. From this position, the firing party is commanded to TANGHAL,
TA before the playing of TAPS or TAWAG PAGHIMLAY. After they
commanded to order arms, the Command Police Non-Commissioned
Officer-in-Charge executes a right (left) face and remains at attention
until the flag has been folded and saluted by the Officer-in-Charge or
Non-Commissioned Officer-in-Charge of the funeral details. At this
time, the firing party Non-Commissioned Officer-in-Charge executes
right left face commands HARAP SA KANAN (KALIWA), RAP;
AGAP, TA; and PASULONG, KAD. The weapons are unloaded and
cleared as soon as possible leaving the gravesite.
c. Undraping of the Flag
Special care should be taken that no part of the flag touches the
ground. The Flag is then carefully folded into the shape of a triangle.
i. At the command of ANGAT BANDILA, NA, begin by holding it with

left hand in waist-high by the pallbearers so that its surface is parallel to the
ground.
ii. Fold the flag lengthwise, blue portion of the flag is folded from the
center then lower with red portion up left pallbearer 1st last holding its edge
while the center pallbearer providing support.


181
iii. Another fold must be made quartering the flag lengthwise,
completely hiding the red field. Fold from the center covering the red portion
and see to it that one star should be facing down.
iv. Make a triangular fold by bringing the blue field corner of the folded
edge to meet the open (top) edge of the flag.
v. Turn the outer (end) point inward, parallel to the open edge, to form
a second triangle.
vi. The folding is continued until the entire length of the flag is folded
and keeps the triangular shape intact.
vii. When the flag is completely folded, it must have one of the stars
and only a sliver of the blue field visible.
viii. The flag is then passed around by the right man pallbearer (first
man on the right) by executing left face while folded flag is placed on the left
breast before giving the flag to the next until reaches the host.
ix. The host will give the flag to the immediate family member
(husband/wife or next of kin) by saying the following remarks:
“(Name of Survivor), this flag is presented to you in behalf of a

grateful nation, as a token of appreciation for the honorable and faithful
services rendered by your loved one.”
Or
“(Pangalan ng naulila), tanggapin nyo and bandilang ito na

sagisag ng ating bansa, bilang ala-ala sa matapat at marangal na
paglilingkod sa bayan ng yumao mong mahal sa buhay, pakaingatan po
ninyo ito.”


182

x. Once received by the immediate family member, the host will
salute.
d. “Last Alarm” Ceremony
The life of a BFP Personnel is closely associated with the ringing of a

bell. As he/she begins his/her hours of duty; it was the bell that started it off.
Through the day and night, each alarm is sounded by a bell, that called
him/her to fight fire and to place his/her life in jeopardy for the good of his/her
fellow man. And when the fire is out and the alarm has come to an end, the
bell rings three times to signal the end. And now
Name of the deceased
________________________________has completed the task, his/her duties
well done and the bell rings three times in memory of, and, in tribute to,
his/her life and service.
Ring bell three times
e. Cremated Remains
i. When the remains are cremated and the ashes interred with BFP
honors, necessary modifications, will govern.
ii. For all phases of the funeral, where the cremated remains are
carried by hand, one man is detailed to carry the receptacle (casket)
containing the ashes and another is detailed to carry the flag, folded into
the shape of cocked hat. The pallbearers carrying the flag are always
positioned to the right of the remains. When the receptacle is carried from
her hearse/fire truck into the chapel and from the chapel to the hearse/fire
truck, these two men are the only participants in the ceremony. During
the procession to the gravesite, the receptacle and flag are carried by the two
pallbearers followed by four additional pallbearers. When the receptacle has
been placed on the gravesite, all six pallbearers unfold the flag and hold it
over the grave.
iii. When the receptacle and flag placed before the chancy of the
chapel are transported to gravesite by vehicle, the receptacle and folded flag
are placed side by side. If the pallbearers walk to the gravesite, the two
bearers who carried the receptacle and the flag join the other four pallbearers
already prepositioned on either side of the hearse/fire truck.
iv. When no hearse/fire truck is used, suitable transportations shall be

provided for the receptacle and flag bearers and other pallbearers.
v. When the remains are removed after the ceremony and the ashes
are to be interred with fire honors at a later time, the ceremony shall consist
only of the escort to the crematory. All personnel salute as the remains are
carried into the crematory. The firing of volleys and the sounding of TAPS
are omitted. When the funeral ceremony is to be held at the crematory, and
when no further honors are anticipated, the volleys are fired and TAPS is
sounded at the discretion of the Commanding Officer.


183
vi. During the taps and volley of firing, the wife/husband/immediate
family (next of kin) and the host will take the same position as in the departure
honor while pallbearers are holding the flag with their left hand at their
waistline level and executing salute until the playing of the TAPS is finished.
vii. While TAPS is being played, the casket is being lowered to the
grave (depending on the situation).



185
CHAPTER XX
PROTOCOL AND
SOCIAL GRACES

CHAPTER XX- PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL GRACES

186
SECTION A
PRECEDENCE
Precedence is the priority of place based on superiority of rank. In protocol,

the observance of precedence is important as it indicates basic recognition and
respect for rank and seniority. Often it is the primary source of goodwill among
diplomats and officials.
1. Precedence among Diplomatic Representatives. Diplomatic representatives, in

international practice, are classified in the order of their ranks as follows:
a. Heads of Mission:
i. Ambassadors or Nuncios accredited to Heads of State, and

other heads of mission of equivalent rank.
ii. Envoys, Ministers and Internuncios accredited to Heads of
State
iii. Charge d’ Affaires ad hoc (or de missi)
iv. Charge d’ Affaires ad interim.
b. Diplomatic officers other than heads of mission
i. Ministers
ii. Ministers-Counsellor
iii. Counsellors
iv. First, Second, Third Secretaries
v. Attachés
2. Precedence Among Heads of Diplomatic Missions
a. Among diplomatic representatives of the same class, for example

Ambassadors, precedence is determined by priority in dates of presentation of
credentials.
b. The ranking of head of mission is the Dean or Doyen of the Diplomatic

Corps. In Catholic countries, however, the representative of the Pope (Nuncio) is
usually the Dean, regardless of the date of his accreditation. According to the Global
Portal for Diplomats, the Dean or Doyen of the Diplomatic Corps serves an important
function as “the Dean represents the diplomatic corps in collective dealings with host
country officials on matters of ceremonial or administrative character affecting the
corps as a whole.”
c. Among Charge d’ Affaires, precedence is determined by the dates of

accreditation. However, a Charge d’ Affaires accredited to the Minister of Foreign
Affairs outranks a Chargé d’ Affaires ad- interim (temporarily acting as Head of
Mission in the absence of the Chief of Mission).


187
3. Precedence of ranking officials of Host Country over foreign Ambassadors
While each country has its own rules, it is generally recognized that the Chief
of State, the Prime Minister, the Presiding Officers of the Legislature, the Chief
Justice of the Supreme Court and the Minister of Foreign Affairs precede foreign
Ambassadors.
In the Philippines, the President, the Vice-President, former Presidents, the

President of the Senate, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, the Chief of
Justice of the Supreme Court and the Secretary of Foreign Affairs precede foreign
Ambassadors.
4. Precedence Among Foreign Service Officers. The following rules, unless

modified by instructions issued to meet a specific case, shall be observed in
determining precedence among Foreign Service Officers in diplomatic and consular
offices abroad:
a. An Officer with a higher rank shall precede one with a lower rank.
b. In case two or more Officers at the same post belong to the same rank and
class, the order or precedence shall be determined by the higher rate of salary within
the class.
c. In case two or more Officers at the post belong to the same class and
receive the same salary, the Officer who first arrived at the post shall take
precedence.
d. When not within the jurisdiction of their assignment, Officers take

precedence among themselves in accordance with their class and date of
appointment to that class.
5. Precedence of officers in the Philippine Foreign Service:
a. Within a mission, the ranking of officers are as follows: Chief of Mission,

Minister, Minister-Counsellor, Counsellor, First Secretary, Second Secretary, Third
Secretary and Attaché.
b. Within a Consulate, the ranking of officers are as follows: Consul General,

Consul and Vice Consul.
c. The Chief of Mission of the Embassy or the Head of the Consular Post
outranks any other Philippine officials, except the President, the Vice President, and
the Secretary of Foreign Affairs, although he may, if desirable for the prestige of the
country, defer to any higher ranking official.
d. The Chief of Mission, or in his absence, the Chargé d’ Affaires, ad interim

precede over all officials and representatives of other Departments or Agencies
assigned in the same Post.
e. The ranking Minister, Counsellor or First, Second, or Third Secretary who is

a regular Foreign Service Officer, irrespective of class and grade and who becomes
a Chargé d’ Affaires, in the absence of the Chief of Mission, shall take precedence
after the Head of Mission.


188
f. Subject to the preceding rule, Attachés and Assistant Attachés, with

assimilated ranks of Foreign Service Officers, shall rank with but immediately after
other regular Foreign Service Officers belonging to the same class and grade.
g. Attaché belonging to the Armed Forces and after them, Trade Promotion
Attachés shall have precedence over other attachés with the same assimilated rank
of Foreign Service Officers. The same rule applies to Assistant Attachés.
h. Assistant Attachés with no assimilated rank of Foreign Service Officers

shall rank after Assistant Attachés with assimilated rank.
6. The General Order of Precedence in the Philippines (as of 2008)
Note: It is always advisable to consult with the Department of Foreign Affairs‟ Office
of Protocol for the latest order of precedence.
• The President
• The Vice President
• Former Presidents of the Philippines
• The President of the Senate
• The Speaker of the House of Representatives
• The Chief Justice of the Supreme Court
• The Secretary of Foreign Affairs
• Foreign Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary
• The Executive Secretary
• The Secretary of Finance
• The Secretary of Justice
• The Secretary of Agriculture
• The Secretary of Public Works and Highways
• The Secretary of Education
• The Secretary of Labor and Employment
• The Secretary of National Defense
• The Secretary of Health
• The Secretary of Trade and Industry
• The Secretary of Social Welfare and Development
• The Secretary of Agrarian Reform
• The Secretary of Environment and Natural Resources
• The Secretary of Interior and Local Government
• The Secretary of Tourism
• The Secretary of Transportation and Communication
• The Secretary of Science and Technology
• The Secretary of Budget and Management
• The Secretary of Energy
• Foreign Envoys Extraordinary and Ministers Plenipotentiary
• The Director General, National Economic and Development
Authority
• Press Secretary
• National Security Council Director-General
• The Head of the Presidential Management Staff


189
• Presidential Spokesman
• Solicitor General
• Presidential Legal Counsel
• The Chairman of the MMDA
• The Head of the Office for Muslim Affairs
• Other Presidential Advisers with Cabinet Rank
• Members of the Senate (seniority in length of service)
• Members of House of Representatives (seniority in length of
service)
• Associate Justices of the Supreme Court
• The Commissioners of Constitutional Commissions
• Members of the Council of State who are not Cabinet Members
• Acting Heads of the Departments & Former Vice Presidents of the
Philippines
• The Undersecretaries of Foreign Affairs
• Ambassadors of the Philippines assigned to foreign posts
• Undersecretaries of the Department, including the Assistant
Executive Secretaries
• Assistant Secretaries of Departments, Directors-General & Chiefs of
Mission I & II of the Department of Foreign Affairs
• The Governor of Central Bank
• Foreign Charges d’ Affaires de missi, Foreign Charge d’ Affairs ad
interim
• The Mayor of Manila
• The Presiding Justice of the Court of Appeals, the President of the
University of the Philippines, the Chief of Staff, Commissioners or
Officials with the rank of Undersecretary
• Heads of permanent United Nations Agencies in the Philippines,
who hold the rank of Director
• Provincial Governors
• The Vice Chief of Staff
• Foreign Ministers-Counsellors, Counsellors of Embassies, Consul
General, Foreign Military Attachés with the rank of Major General or
Rear Admiral, and Officers of equivalent rank of the Armed Forces of
the Philippines
• Judges of the Regional Trial Court
• First Secretaries of Foreign Embassies, Foreign Military Attachés
with the rank of Brigadier General or Commodore & Officers of
equivalent rank of the Armed Forces of the Philippines
• Mayors of chartered cities
• Directors/Commissioners of Bureau & Chief of Offices
• Presidents, Chairmen & Managers of government corporations
• Second Secretaries & Consuls of Foreign Embassies, Foreign
Military Attachés with the rank of Colonel or Lieutenant Colonel, and
Officers of equivalent rank of the Armed Forces of the Philippines
• Third Secretaries & Vice Consuls of Foreign Embassies, Foreign
Military Attachés with the rank of Major or Captain & Officers of
equivalent rank of the Armed Forces of the Philippines


190
7. Some Practical Applications of the Protocol of Precedence:
a. Charge d’Affaires (CDA) of an embassy outranks CDA of a Legation.

(Legations are seldom sent by States now).
b. If Chief of Mission (CM) is a lady and the function involves only CM without
their wives, the lady diplomat attends without the husband.
c. Where the Ambassador or Minister is a lady and the function requires the
presence of the CM, who are arranged either as a group or separately from their
husbands, the lady Ambassador or Minister ranks after the wife of the Ambassador
or Minister who precedes her (the Lady Ambassador or Minister). Her husband is
ranked after the last accredited Minister.
d. In standing, walking or sitting, the place of honor is at the right – when the
person entitled thereto stands or walks at the right.
e. Precedence is when the person entitled to it, goes a step before the other
who is at his left side as in ascending a stair or entering a room.
f. In lateral arrangement, when persons present stand side by side in a

straight line, the outside place on the right or the central place is the first. Seating
arrangements on stage:
Even numbers: Odd numbers:
3 1 2 4 4 2 1 3 5
(Audience view)
g. When two persons enter a room or walk single file, the one of higher rank
walks ahead or in front of the person of lower rank.
h. When two persons walk side by side, the one of higher rank walks to the
right of the person of lower rank.
i. When there are three persons, the second ranking person enters first,
followed by the highest-ranking person. The last to go in is the person of lowest rank.


191
j. When there are four, the fourth enters first. If they are five, the fourth and
the second go in first in that order, then the first, followed by the third and the fifth.
k. The place of honor depends on the number of people present.
l. The person of higher rank in a public ceremony is always the last to arrive
and the first to leave.
m. In going up airplanes, the person of highest rank goes up last and comes
down first.
n. In entering a car, the person of highest rank enters first. However, when the
intention is to give him the seat to the right, which is the place of honor, it is correct
for the person of lower rank to go in first.
8. Protocol in International Organizations
a. ASEAN
When ASEAN Heads of States meet in a Summit meeting or when ASEAN

Foreign Ministers meet in a Foreign Ministers’ meeting, their positions in standing or
sitting position is done according to the alphabetical listings of their countries in the
English Language. Thus, the positions from left to right (from the view of the
observer) are as follows:


192
b. Asia-Pacific Economic Council (APEC)
APEC is represented by either the Heads of State, Heads of Government,

Foreign Ministers or a senior official.
When standing together in a line or sitting together in a line, their positions are
also according to the alphabetical listings of their countries from left to right from the
view of the observer. The following illustration maybe used as a guide:
Note: To conform to local protocol rules, consult with the MFA of the Host Country of
the meeting.
c. If a member of a Royalty is present on the occasion, follow the normal rule

of the precedence -- that is, the honored person is given the place of honor and
stands or sits at the right of the Host.
Note: To conform to local protocol rules, consult with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs
of the Host Country of the meeting.


193
9. Precedence in signing treaties
a. Principle of Alternat - in bilateral treaties, each country signs first on the

original copy it retains. In this example, the part of the document where the
signatories would sign should be:
b. In multilateral treaties, signatories sign in alphabetical order in

French or English language of the names of their countries.
Example: ASEAN Countries
Brunei
Darussalam
Cambodia
Indonesia
Lao PDR
Malaysia
Myanmar
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Vietnam
SECTION B
ASSUMPTION OF CHARGE
1. ASSUMPTION OF CHARGE OF DIPLOMATIC MISSIONS
a. Agrèation and Agrèment
Before the public announcement of the appointment of an Ambassador, an

informal inquiry as to whether or not he is persona non grata is ordinarily made with
the government of the country of his prospective assignment. The process of inquiry
is called agrèation. The reply to the inquiry expressing acceptability of the
Ambassador is called agreement, or agrèment.


194
b. Documents for the Ambassador
After taking his oath of office, an Ambassador shall be furnished the following
papers:
i. Appointment as Ambassador
ii. A sealed letter of credence
iii. An open or office copy of the letter of credence
iv. Letter of recall of his predecessor, if any
v. Instructions in writing
vi. Diplomatic passports for himself, his family and his suite
vii. A copy of the Regulations of the Department of Foreign Affairs
c. Preparations Prior to Departure
The Secretary of Foreign Affairs shall invite a newly appointed Ambassador

for a briefing and give the necessary instructions to be carried out in the
Ambassador’s post of assignment. The Ambassador should familiarize himself with
the operation of his post of assignment by going through relevant documents, such
as treaties and agreements between the Philippines and the host country and, if
necessary, with other countries that are part of his jurisdiction. He should meet with
concerned officials, offices, and divisions which could give substantial inputs
regarding his post and country of assignment. He should consult with the appropriate
Department officials regarding general matters of administration and official
procedures.
d. Preliminaries for Presentation of Credentials
i. Promptly upon arrival at the post, the newly appointed Ambassador

shall request for an informal conference with the Minister or Secretary of
Foreign Affairs to arrange for the formal presentation of his letter of credence
and the letter of recall of his predecessor, if any, to the Chief of State.
ii. He shall at the same time, in his own name, address a formal note to
the Secretary or Minister of Foreign Affairs, communicating the fact of his
appointment and requesting the designation of a time and place for his official
reception. In the informal conference, he shall present to the Minister or
Secretary of Foreign Affairs the open copy of his letter of credence as well as
the copy of his address to be delivered during the presentation of his
credentials.
iii. If the diplomatic representative has the rank of Charge d‟Affaires,

the letter of credence is addressed to the Minister or Secretary of Foreign
Affairs. He shall address a formal note to the latter, conveying to the Minister
or Secretary the open copy of his letter of credence and shall await the
Minister’s or Secretary’s pleasure for presentation of the original.
iv. A copy of the letter of credence shall be placed in the archives of the
mission.


195
e. Ceremony in Presentation of Credentials
i. On the occasion of the presentation of letters of credence to the Chief

of State, it is customary in most capitals for the incoming Ambassador to
make a brief address. The address shall be delivered either in English or
Filipino. Copies of the address and of the reply must be sent to the
Department. The speeches made in the ceremonies are purely formal and
should not allude to any controversial matter between the two governments.
ii. The Chief of Protocol of the post should be consulted as to the

proper attire to be worn in the ceremony.
iii. The newly appointed diplomatic representative should be

accompanied by all Foreign Service Officers, attachés and other officers
assigned to the mission in a diplomatic capacity when presenting his letter of
credence, if this arrangement is in accordance with local protocol.
f. Entry Upon Official Day
The official duties of a diplomatic representative in so far as the receiving

state is concerned begin on the day of his presentation of the letter of credence by
the Ambassador to the Chief of State, or in the case of a charge d’ affaires, to the
Minister or Secretary of Foreign Affairs. If the formal audience or reception is
delayed, it is customary for the Minister or Secretary of Foreign Affairs to make
necessary arrangements for the transaction of diplomatic business with the new
representative pending such reception.
g. Official Calls Upon Entry to Duty
The diplomatic representative shall, immediately upon his arrival, study the
local rules and practices regarding official calls on other officials of the host
government and members of the diplomatic corps, which a mission already
established should have in its files. In his initial official visits, he may be
accompanied by the ranking Foreign Service Officer assigned to the mission in a
diplomatic capacity. In all cases, he should call on the diplomatic representatives of
ASEAN member states.
h. Subordinate Diplomatic Officers
No previous approval by a receiving government is ordinarily required in the

case of subordinate diplomatic personnel in a mission, although it is generally
recognized that the receiving government has the right to object to any prospective
diplomatic officer. In some countries, however, previous approval is required for
military and other armed forces attachés.
i. Preparation before Departure of other Diplomatic Officers
Subordinate diplomatic personnel, before their departure for their foreign

posts, should familiarize themselves with the work of the mission to which they are to
be assigned. They should read the Post Reports and other pertinent documents in
the Department. The Office of Personnel and Administrative Services shall program
their enrolment in the pre-departure orientation seminar conducted by the Foreign
Service Institute.


196
j. Calls for Subordinate Officers
i. Local practice shall be followed as to whether subordinate diplomatic

officers should call or not on their counterparts in the diplomatic corps or on
other officials of the Foreign Office of the host government. In lieu of calls, the
cards of the officers, accompanied by the card of the Head of Mission, are
usually sent to members of the diplomatic corps with the mark “p.p.” (pour
presenter) in pencil at the lower left-hand corner of the card of the Head of
Mission.
ii. In the large capitals, calls might be impracticable. However, in all

cases, the mission shall send notes to the Foreign Office and to the other
diplomatic missions at the post informing them of the arrival and assumption
of duties of the subordinate diplomatic officer.
iii. The arrival of all subordinate personnel, diplomatic and non-

diplomatic, and changes in the order of precedence in the mission shall be
communicated in a formal note to the Foreign Office of the host government.
2. ASSUMPTION OF CHARGE OF CONSULAR ESTABLISHMENTS
a. Need for Authority from the Receiving Government
Performance of consular functions on the part of the consular officer requires

previous authority from the foreign government given in the form of an exequatur; or
pending its issuance, a provisional recognition.
b. Commission on Exequatur
The consular commission is the formal appointment of a consular officer by

the Head of State of the sending government, and the exequatur is the formal
acceptance by the receiving government for him to perform consular functions.
The consular commission is transmitted by the Department to the diplomatic

mission, if there be one, in the country where the consular office is located, with
instructions to request for an exequatur from the host Foreign Office. When obtained,
the exequatur is transmitted by the diplomatic mission to the consular office.
c. Provisional Recognition
Whenever there is delay in the issuance of a consular commission and/or of

the exequatur, a provisional recognition shall be requested beforehand to enable the
consular officer to perform consular functions.
A provisional recognition is requested by the diplomatic mission, upon

instructions from the Home Office, in a note to the local Foreign Office, which grants
provisional recognition in a return note.


197
d. Preparation for Duty and Official Calls
i. A principal officer who will head a consular post shall prepare for his
assignment in the same manner that the diplomatic representative does.
ii. A consular officer, upon assuming his official duties, shall send his
official card to, or call personally on, the proper local officials and his
counterparts in the consular corps, depending upon the local custom. The
principal officer shall, in all cases, call on the heads of ASEAN missions in the
area of his assignment.
SECTION C
PROCEDURES FOR INCOMING AND OUTGOING
FOREIGN AMBASSADORS TO THE PHILIPPINES
AND PRESENTATION OF CREDENTIALS
1. PROCEDURES
a. For incoming Ambassadors
i. Checklist for Preparatory Arrangements
The concerned Embassy should furnish in advance the Office of

Protocol and State Visits of the Department of Foreign Affairs with the
following:
• Car flag of the Ambassador’s country

• Audio cassette or CD and musical score of the national anthem
• Advance copy of the speech which the Ambassador will hand
over during the presentation of credentials
• Open copies of the Letters of Credence and Recall
• Two (2) 2” x 2” photographs of the Ambassador-designate
• Two (2) 2” x 2” photographs of the Ambassador-designate’s
spouse (if any)
ii. Pre-arrival Arrangements
(A) For a resident Ambassador-designate: The Embassy

makes arrangements with the Office of Protocol and State Visits
(OPSV) of the Department of Foreign Affairs for the arrival and
presentation of credentials of the Ambassador designate. The
Embassy is requested to inform the Department as soon as available
or at least 3-4 weeks before the intended arrival in Manila so that initial
verification of calendar possibilities for the courtesy calls and
presentation of credentials could be made. However, the exact date
and time of presentation of credentials are set only after the
Ambassador-designate has actually arrived in the Philippines.


198
(B) For a non-resident Ambassador-designate: Arrangements

for the arrival and presentation of credentials are made with the Office
of Protocol and State Visits through the Philippine Embassy in the
capital where the Ambassador-designate is a resident, and when
applicable, through the consulate in Manila of the Ambassador-
designate’s country. The Office of Protocol and State Visits can also
make arrangements for the hotel and vehicle needs of the
Ambassador-designate upon his request. Procedures for preparing the
schedule of calls of a non-resident Ambassador-designate are similar
to those of a resident Ambassador-designate. Scheduling of
presentation of credentials of non-resident Ambassadors-designates
are done on certain pre-determined periods/dates of the year. The non-
resident Ambassadors are advised of the exact dates of presentation of
credentials as early as possible in order to provide ample preparation
time for travel arrangements.
iii. Arrival in the Philippines
(A) For arrivals during regular working days, the Ambassador-

designate is met by the Deputy Chief of Protocol of the Department of
Foreign Affairs. For arrivals on weekends, legal, official and religious
holidays, the Ambassador-designate is met by a Protocol Officer of the
Department of Foreign Affairs. However, it would be appreciated if
the Ambassador- designate could arrive at a convenient day or
time (avoiding, as much as possible, legal, official and religious
holidays, as well as early morning and late night arrivals).
Following are regular holidays observed in the Philippines:
Regular National Holidays

New Year’s Day January 1
Maundy Thursday Movable
Good Friday Movable
Araw ng Kagitingan April 9
Labor Day May 1
Independence Day June 12
National Heroes (last Sunday of August)
Day Bonifacio Day November 30
Christmas Day December 25
Rizal Day December 30
Nationwide Special Public Non-Working Holidays

Anniversary of EDSA February 25
People Power Revolution
Black Saturday Movable
Eid El Fitr Movable
All Saints Day November 1
Christmas Eve December 24
Last Day of the Year (Special Holiday) December 31


199
(B) The Office of Protocol and State Visits makes appropriate
arrangements for airport courtesies and related matters with the airport
authorities regarding the arrival of the Ambassador- designate. A
designated airport lounge, at the NAIA Terminal he/she will be arriving
in, will be used for the reception of the arriving Ambassador-designate.
Aside from the Embassy’s Chargé d’Affaires a.i., a reasonable number
of Embassy staff and spouses, if so desired, may be allowed at the
airport for the Ambassador-designate’s arrival. Entry of persons and
vehicles into restricted areas of the airport is subject to pre-arranged
standard procedure. Immigration, customs and quarantine formalities for
the Ambassador-designate and his party will be attended to and
facilitated by the Office of Protocol and State Visits.
iv. Official Welcome at the Department of Foreign Affairs; Calls on

the DFA Chief of Protocol, the Assistant Secretary for the
Geographic Region and the Secretary of Foreign Affairs
(A) The Ambassador-designate, accompanied by an Embassy

official normally the Chargé d’Affaires a.i.,), arrives at the Department of
Foreign Affairs to make calls on the DFA Chief of Protocol, the Assistant
Secretary for the Geographic Region and thereafter on the Secretary of
Foreign Affairs.
(B) Upon arrival at the Office of Protocol and State Visits, the
Ambassador-designate signs the Register of Ambassadors and
Distinguished Visitors. After a briefing on the ceremony and
arrangements for the presentation of credentials, the Ambassador-
designate is escorted by a Protocol Officer for the call on the Assistant
Secretary of the Geographic Region. Thereafter, the Chief of Protocol
accompanies the Ambassador- designate and his companion to the
Office of the Secretary of Foreign Affairs.
(C) During the call on the Secretary of Foreign Affairs, the

Ambassador-designate hands over to the Secretary the open copies of
the Ambassador’s Letter of Credence and the Letter of Recall of his
predecessor, as well as a copy of the text of the presentation speech,
the original of which the Ambassador- designate shall hand over to the
President during the presentation of credentials ceremony.
v. Calls on Other High Government Officials
The Department, through the office handling the geographic

region of the Ambassador-designate, should be informed if the
Ambassador-designate intends to pay courtesy calls on other high
government officials after the presentation of credentials. However, such
calls are to be arranged by the Embassy directly with the offices of said
officials.


200
b. For Outgoing Ambassadors
i. Farewell Calls
(A) For a resident Ambassador: When an Ambassador is

about to end his/her tour of duty, the Embassy informs the Department,
through a note verbale, indicating his/her intended date of departure.
The Department would appreciate receiving information on the
departure preferably 2-3 weeks before the Ambassador’s intended
departure. Requests for farewell calls on the Secretary of Foreign
Affairs and the President are arranged through the office of Protocol
and State Visits in coordination with the concerned geographic office.
The Office of Protocol and State Visits will inform the Embassy of the
exact time/date of farewell calls on the Secretary of Foreign Affairs and
the President. All other farewell calls of the Ambassador on other
government officials (other than the Secretary of Foreign Affairs and
the President) may be arranged by the Embassy directly with the
offices of said officials, however, the office handling the geographic
region of the Ambassador-designate should be informed of such calls.
(B) For a non-resident Ambassador: The procedure of

arranging and scheduling farewell calls of a non-resident Ambassador
shall be similar to that of a resident Ambassador. However, the
Ambassador’s intention to come to the Philippines to pay his farewell
calls on Philippine officials must be communicated as early as possible
to the Philippine Embassy, in the capital where the Ambassador-
designate is a resident, well in advance.
ii. Airport Arrangements for Departure
The Office of Protocol and State Visits, upon receipt of the notice
of the Ambassador’s departure, makes appropriate arrangements with
the airport authorities. A special lounge at the airport will be used for
the sending off of the Ambassador.
During regular working days, the DFA Chief of Protocol/Deputy

Chief of Protocol sends off the outgoing Ambassador at the designated
special lounge at the airport. For departures on weekends, legal, official
and religious holidays, the Ambassador is sent off by a Protocol Officer
of the Department of Foreign Affairs. However, it would be appreciated
if the Ambassador-designate could depart at a convenient day/time
(avoiding, as much as possible, legal, official and religious holidays, as
well as early morning and late night departures).
2. PROCEDURES FOR PRESENTATION OF CREDENTIALS

a. Attire
The Ambassador-designate and members of his/her entourage may wear
their national dress, diplomatic uniform, complete morning formals or business suit.
A rosette or miniatures of decorations, if any, may be worn on the occasion.


201
b. Members of the Ambassador-designate’s entourage
The entourage for the presentation of credentials shall be composed of the

members of the diplomatic staff and shall not exceed a total of six (6) persons,
including the Ambassador-designate. (A complete list of the entourage must be
submitted to the Office of Protocol and State Visits at least 48 hours before the date
of the presentation of credentials).
c. Departure for Malacañan Palace
i. The DFA Chief of Protocol, together with the Director of Ceremonials

and the Philippine Military Aide, proceed to the Ambassador-designate’s
residence in the ceremonial car with motorcade escorts. They are met at the
door of the residence by a diplomatic officer who accompanies them to the
room where the Ambassador-designate awaits to welcome them and
introduce his/her spouse and members of the diplomatic staff present.
ii. The Ambassador-designate hands over to the Philippine Military Aide

the original Letters of Credence and Recall together with the original text of
the presentation speech for safekeeping until the actual ceremony.
iii. From the residence of the Ambassador-designate, the party shall

proceed to Malacañan Palace in the following manner:
(1) The Ambassador-designate, assisted by the Philippine

Military Aide, boards the ceremonial car on the right side and takes the
rear right seat. The DFA Chief of Protocol boards the ceremonial car on
the left side and takes the rear left seat. The Philippine Military Aide
takes the front seat to the right of the chauffeur. The Philippine flag is
unfurled and remains so during the time the ceremonial car is in use by
the Ambassador-designate.
(2) The rest of the entourage board their respective vehicles

arranged in the order of precedence. It would be practical to have at
least two entourage members per vehicle in order to shorten the length
of the motorcade. The car of the Chargé d’ Affaires shall fly the flag of
his/her country.
(3) The motorcade with escort cars and motorcycles leading the
way proceed to Malacañan Palace.
d. Arrival Honors at Malacañan Palace
i. When the motorcade comes to a stop at the palace grounds, the

Ambassador-designate and other passengers of the ceremonial car wait for
few seconds before alighting. This momentary delay is to enable the rest of
the entourage to leave their vehicles and position themselves at the point of
disembarkation of the Ambassador-designate.
ii. After alighting from the ceremonial car, the DFA Chief of Protocol
introduces the Military Host of the Presidential Security Group Honor Guards


202
to the Ambassador-designate. They then proceed to the salute base, followed

by the rest of the entourage, for the rendering of honors to the Ambassador-
designate by the Honor Guards. In proceeding to the place of honor at the
salute base, the Ambassador-designate is escorted on his left by the Military
Host of the Presidential Security Group and on his right by the DFA Chief of
Protocol. The Philippine Military Aide will be directly behind the Military Host
from the Presidential Security Group.
iii. The rest of the entourage are guided by the Director of Ceremonials
to the area behind the principal personages and position themselves in a
horizontal line in accordance with their order of precedence. The highest
ranking diplomatic staff member shall be the person at the right-most end of
the line, to his left will be the other entourage members according to
descending order of precedence. The Director of Ceremonials shall be
positioned at the left flank of the line.
iv. As soon as the Ambassador-designate and his entourage are in

their respective places, the Honor Guards execute Present Arms and the
band plays the national anthem of the Ambassador-designate, followed by the
Philippine National Anthem. During the playing of the anthems, all participants
stand at attention and render appropriate respect.
v. At the conclusion of the anthems, the Military Host from the

Presidential Security Group invites the Ambassador-designate to review the
troops. For this purpose, the Ambassador-designate is jointly escorted by the
Military Host from the Presidential Security Group and the Honor Guards
Commander. They proceed leftward to the front line of the assembled band
and troops.
vi. As they walk down the line to the right side and reach the center
where the Colors are located, the Ambassador-designate may salute the
Colors by executing a hand salute or by a slight bow of the head.
vii. At the end of the line, they turn right and return in a diagonal angle
to their original angle to their original places at the salute base. (This
movement is similar to tracing the sides of a triangle).
viii. The ceremony concludes when the Honor Guards Commander

offers a handshake and executes a salute to the Ambassador-designate.
ix. As soon as the ceremony is over, the Ambassador-designate and

the members of his entourage are escorted to the main doorway of
Malacañan Palace. The Ambassador-designate is flanked on the right by the
DFA Chief of Protocol and on the left by the Military Aide. The others follow
according to their order of precedence. At the doorway, the Chief of
Presidential Protocol awaits the Ambassador-designate. The DFA Chief of
Protocol introduces the Chief of Presidential Protocol to the Ambassador-
designate.
x. The Chief of Presidential Protocol escorts the Ambassador-

designate into the presidential palace and leads him to the table where the


203
Presidential Registry Book is located. While the Ambassador-designate is
signing the book, the rest of the entourage are assembled slightly behind him.
xi. The Chief of Presidential Protocol invites the Ambassador-designate

and his entourage to a designated holding room for a briefing on the scenario
of the presentation of credentials.
e. The Presentation of Credentials Ceremony
i. Upon the signal of the Chief of Presidential Protocol, the

Ambassador- designate and his entourage are invited to take their positions.
The Ambassador-designate takes the front position and slightly behind him on
his left is the Philippine Military Aide and on his right is the DFA Chief of
Protocol. Behind them on a horizontal line is the entourage of the
Ambassador-designate, with the highest ranking member being the person in
the right end followed to his left by the other members in descending order of
precedence. The Director of Ceremonials takes his position on the left flank of
the line formed by the entourage members.
ii. Upon arrival, the President proceeds to the designated position for
the start of the presentation of credentials flanked to the right by the
Secretary/Undersecretary of Foreign Affairs (a pace behind the President),
and to the left by the Chief of Presidential Protocol (also a pace behind).
iii. The DFA Chief of Protocol then introduces the Ambassador-

designate to the President as follows: “Mr./Mme President, I have the honor
to present, His/Her Excellency (name) Ambassador Extraordinary and
Plenipotentiary of the (country) to the Republic of the Philippines.”
iv. The Ambassador-designate delivers brief remarks (not the whole

speech, but only a few sentences). The Philippine Military Aide steps forward
to hand over the folder, continuing the Letters of Credence and Recall and the
original text of the presentation speech to the Ambassador-designate. The
Ambassador-designate then steps forward and hands to the President the
said folder.
v. The President delivers his/her remarks. The President and the new
Ambassador shake hands and exchange amenities. The President informs
the new Ambassador that he/she may now wish to present the members of
his entourage. The Ambassador presents individually the members of the
entourage who step forward, (the most senior in rank at the head of the line)
and shake hands with the President. Then the entourage members return to
their designated places.
vi. After the introduction of the entourage the following photo

opportunities may ensue: a. The President and the new Ambassador; b. The
President, The Secretary of Foreign Affairs, the new Ambassador and his
entourage.
vii. The President invites the Ambassador for a private conversation in

the adjoining room together with the Secretary/Undersecretary of Foreign


204
Affairs. The invitation may expressly include the most senior staff member of
the Ambassador. The rest of the entourage returns to wait at the receiving
salon. At the conclusion of the private conversation, the Ambassador takes
leave of the President and the Secretary/ Undersecretary of Foreign Affairs.
viii. The Ambassador is escorted from the room by the Chief of

Presidential Protocol, then through the cordon of honor guards. The rest of
the entourage follows the Ambassador. At the foyer, the Chief of Presidential
Protocol bids farewell to the Ambassador and his entourage.
ix. The Ambassador, assisted by the Philippine Military Aide, boards

the ceremonial car on the right side and takes the rear right seat. The DFA
Chief of Protocol boards the ceremonial car on the left side and takes the rear
left seat. The Philippine Military Aide takes the front seat to the right of the
chauffeur. The car flag of the Ambassador’s country is unfurled at the
ceremonial car. The car flag on the motor car of the Chargé d’Affaires is no
longer flown. The motorcade proceeds to Rizal Park.
f. Wreath Laying Ceremony at the Monument of the National Hero, Dr.

Jose P. Rizal
NOTE: This is an integral part of the presentation ceremonies.
i. Arrival/Anthems
(A) In front of the monument of the National Hero Dr. Jose Rizal,
the new Ambassador, accompanied by the DFA Chief of Protocol/Protocol
Official, is greeted by the Military Host. The DFA Chief of
Protocol/Protocol Official and the military Host escort the Ambassador to
his place of honor at a position facing but distant from the monument.
(B) The Ambassador is flanked on his right by the Chief of Protocol

and on his left by the Military Host. The Ambassador’s entourage is
guided by the Director of Ceremonials to their respective positions in a
horizontal line behind the Ambassador and his escorts.
(C) The Commander orders the Ceremonial Guards to present

arms. The military band plays the national anthem of the country of the
Ambassador followed by the Philippine National Anthem.
(D) All civilian and military participants stand at attention and

render appropriate respect to the national anthem. After the last note of
the anthem, the guards are commanded to Order Arms.
ii. Processional/Wreath Offering
(A) The rest of the entourage remains in place while the

Ambassador, on cue of and escorted by the Military Host and the DFA
Chief of Protocol/Protocol Official, walks toward the monument. The DFA
Chief of Protocol/Protocol Official and the Military Host stop at the foot of
the steps.


205
(B) The Ambassador goes up to the base of the monument where
he stops to place the wreath. The wreath is brought up and put in place by
the Ambassador with the help of the military wreath bearers.
iii. Gun Salute and Taps/Recessional
(A) When the wreath is in place, the Ambassador, still facing the
monument, takes two to three steps backwards and stands at attention. At
this time, the ceremonial guards are commanded to Present Arms,
followed by three volleys of rifle fire and the playing of “Taps” by the band.
At the last note of Taps, the ceremonial guards are commanded to Order
Arms (“BABA...ta!” in the Filipino language).
(B)This is the signal for the Ambassador to turn around, walk away
from the monument and toward the DFA Chief of Protocol/Protocol Official
and the Philippine Military Aide. When the Ambassador reaches them, the
DFA Chief of Protocol/Protocol Official and the Philippine Military Aide
take their respective escort positions beside the Ambassador and they
walk back to the Ambassador’s original place of honor at the start of the
ceremony.
(C) On reaching their places in front of the rest of the entourage,

the Ambassador and his escorts turn around to face the monument. At the
conclusion of the ceremony, the Ambassador shakes hands with the
Commander of the Ceremonial Guards.
(D) The Ambassador is escorted to the ceremonial car by the

Military Host and the DFA Chief of Protocol / Protocol Official, followed by
the Military Aide and the rest of the entourage who board their respective
vehicles for the motorcade back to the residence of the Ambassador.
(E) After a few minutes of congratulatory amenities and informal

conversation at the Ambassador’s residence, the DFA Chief of
Protocol/Protocol Official, the Military Aide, and their staff take leave of the
Ambassador, his/her spouse and the diplomatic staff.
SECTION D
NATIONAL FLAG, ANTHEM, MOTTO, COAT-OF-
ARMS AND OTHER HERALDIC ITEMS AND DEVICES
OF THE PHILIPPINES
The Philippine Flag and Anthem, motto, coat-of-arms and other heraldic items
are national symbols “which embody the national ideals and traditions, and which
express the principles of sovereignty and national solidarity; they seek to manifest
the national virtues and to inculcate in the minds and hearts of our people a just
pride in their native land.” Thus, utmost reverence and respect should be accorded
to these symbols. Republic Act 8491, or the Flag and Heraldic Code of the
Philippines, prescribes how these national symbols should be properly treated.


206
1. THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL FLAG
a. Care of the National Flag
The use and care of the flag of the Philippines shall be done in a manner
manifesting deep respect for the national emblem. Every precaution shall be
exercised in its handling and care.
b. Display of the National Flag in Philippine Missions and Official

Functions Abroad
i. The flag shall be flown over a Philippine mission or consulate

between the hours of sunrise and sunset on all Philippine national holidays;
on certain holidays in the country where the mission or consulate is located;
and on such other occasions as the officer in charge may deem appropriate.
When necessary, the flag may also be flown for purposes of protection.
However, the local usages in this display of the flag should be appropriately
considered.
ii. The flag should be displayed only from sunrise to sunset or between
hours as may be designated by the Department. It should always be hoisted
briskly and lowered slowly and ceremoniously. It should not be flown when the
weather is inclement. The flag shall not be raised when the weather is
inclement. If already raised, the flag shall not be lowered
iii. The flag, if flown from a flagpole, shall have its blue field on top in
time of peace and the red field on top in time of war; if in a hanging position,
the blue field shall be to the right (left of the observer) in time of peace, and
the red field to the right (left of the observer) in time of war. The flagpole staff
must be straight and slightly tapering at the top.
iv. If planted on the ground, the flagpole shall be at a prominent place

and shall be of such height as would give the flag commanding position in
relation to the buildings in the vicinity. If attached to a building, the flagpole
shall be on top of its roof or anchored on a sill projecting at an angle upward.
If on a stage or platform or Philippine government office, the flag shall be at
the left (facing the stage) or the left of the office upon entering.
v. When the Philippine flag is flown with another flag, the flags, if both
are national flags, must be flown on separate staffs of the same height and
shall be of equal size. If in Philippine territory, the Philippine flag shall be
hoisted first and lowered last. If the other flag is not a national flag, it may be
flown in the same lineyard as the Philippine flag but below the latter and it
cannot be of greater size than the Philippine flag.
vi. In Philippine territory, when displayed with another flag, the

Philippine flag shall be on the right of the other flag. If there is a line of other
flags, the Philippine flag shall be in the middle of the line. When carried in a
parade with flags which are not national flags, the Philippine flag shall be in
front of the center of the line.


207
vii. When used on a speaker’s platform, the flag should be displayed
above and behind the speaker, never on the front of the platform. If flown from
a staff, it should be on the speaker’s right.
viii. No flag or pennant should ever be flown above the Philippine flag,
except the church pennant, which should fly above the flag during divine
services on board a Philippine war vessel.
ix. The flag shall be hoisted to the top briskly and lowered
ceremoniously. The flag shall never touch anything beneath it, such as the
ground, flood, water or other objects. After being lowered, the flag shall be
handled and folded solemnly as part of the ceremony.
x. The flag should never be draped over the head, top, or other part of
a vehicle or of a railroad train or boat. When the flag is displayed in a
motorcar, the staff should be affixed firmly to the chassis.
xi. The colors should never be draped with black crepe except when
the President declares a national mourning.
xii. The flag should be loaned only when the purpose for which it is
requested is a proper one, e.g., to drape on the casket of a deceased veteran.
xiii. When it is desired to use the national colors as a covering for a

speaker’s desk, in general, bunting should be used. Bunting should be
arranged with the blue above, the white in the middle, and the red below.
xiv. A flag worn out through wear and tear shall not be thrown away. It
shall be solemnly burned to avoid misuse or desecration. The flag shall be
replaced immediately when it begins to show signs of wear and tear.
c. Salute to the Flag
During the ceremony of hoisting or lowering the flag or when the flag is
passing in a parade or in a review, all persons present should face the flag, stand at
attention, and salute. The salute is executed by placing the right hand over the heart.
Men should remove their hats or head dresses with the right hand and hold them at
the left breast. The salute to the flag in the moving column is rendered at the
moment the flag passes. When the national anthem is played, the same manner of
saluting the flag is to be observed.
d. Conduct of Flag-Raising Ceremony
i. All government offices and foreign missions shall observe the flag-
raising ceremony every Monday morning and the flag-lowering ceremony
every Friday afternoon. The ceremony shall be simple and dignified and shall
include the playing or singing of the Philippine National Anthem.
ii. The observance of the flag ceremony in official or civic gatherings

shall be simple and dignified and shall include the playing or singing of the
anthem in its original Filipino lyrics and march tempo.


208
iii. During the flag-raising ceremony, the assembly shall stand in

formation facing the flag. At the moment the first note of the anthem is heard,
everyone in the premises shall come to attention; moving vehicles shall stop.
All persons present shall place their right palms over their chests, those with
hats shall uncover; while those in military, scouting, security guard, and
citizens military training uniforms shall give the salute prescribed by their
regulations, which salute shall be completed upon the last note of the anthem.
iv. The assembly shall sing the Philippine national anthem,

accompanied by a band, if available, and at the first note, the flag shall be
raised briskly. The same procedure shall be observed when the flag is
passing in review or in parade.
e. Conduct of the Flag-Lowering Ceremony
During the flag-lowering, the flag shall be lowered solemnly and slowly so that
the flag shall be down the mast at the sound of the last note of the anthem. Those in
the assembly shall observe the same deportment or shall observe the same
behavior as for the flag-raising ceremony.
f. Half Mast
The flag shall be flown at half-mast as a sign or mourning on all the buildings
and places where it is displayed, as provided for in this Act, on the day of official
announcement of the death of any of the following officials:
i. The President or a former President; for ten (10) days;

ii. The Vice-President, the Chief Justice, the President of the Senate and
the Speaker of the House of Representatives, for seven (7) days; and
iii. Other persons as determined by the government.
The flag, when flown at half-mast, shall be first hoisted to peak for a moment
then lowered to the half-mast position. The flag shall again be raised to the peak
before it is lowered for the day.
The flag may be used to cover the caskets of the honored dead of the military,
veterans of previous wars, national artists, and of civilians who have rendered
distinguished service to the nation, as may be determined by the local government
unit concerned. In such cases, the flag shall be placed such that the white triangle
shall be at the head and the blue portion shall cover the right side of the caskets.
The flag shall not be lowered to the grave or allowed to touch the ground, but shall
be folded solemnly and handed over to the heirs of the deceased.
g. Pledge to the Flag
The following shall be the Pledge of Allegiance to the Philippine flag:
Ako ay Pilipino
Buong katapatang nanunumpa
Sa watawat ng Pilipinas
At sa bansang kanyang sinasagisag


209
Na may dangal, katarungan at kalayaan
Na pinakikilos ng sambayanang
Maka-Diyos
Maka-tao
Makakalikasan at
Makabansa.
Such pledge shall be recited while standing with the right hand with palm
open raised shoulder high. Individuals whose faith or religious beliefs prohibit them
from making such pledge must nonetheless show full respect when the pledge is
being rendered by standing at attention.
h. Flag Days
The period from May 28 to June 12 of each year is declared as Flag Days,
during which period all offices, agencies and instrumentalities or government,
Philippine business establishments, institutions of learning and private homes are
enjoined to display the flag.
i. Specifications of the National Flag
i. The flag shall have the following proportions. The width of the flag, 1;
the length of the flag, 2; and the sides of the white triangle, 1.
ii. The technical specifications shall be as follows: The blue color shall
bear Cable No. 80173; the white color, Cable No. 80001; the red color, Cable
No. 80108; and the golden yellow, Cable No. 80068.
iii. All requisitions for the purchase of the Philippine National Flag must
be based on strict compliance with the design, color, craftsmanship and
material requirements of the Government. Coordinate with the DFA Home
Office for the purchase and acquisition of the Flag.
j. Prohibited Acts on the Use of the Philippine Flag
It shall be prohibited:
i. To mutilate, deface, defile, trample on or cast contempt or commit

any act or omission casting dishonor or ridicule upon the flag or over its
surface;
ii. To dip the flag to any person or object by way of compliment or
salute;
iii. To use the flag:
(A) As a drapery, festoon, tablecloth;
(B) As covering for ceilings, walls, statues, or other objects;
(C) As a pennant in the hood, side, back and top of motor vehicles;
(D) As a staff or whip;

(E) For unveiling monuments or statues; and
(F) As trademarks, or for industrial, commercial or agricultural
labels or designs.


210
To display the flag:
(A) Under any painting or picture;

(B) Horizontally face-up. It shall always be hoisted aloft and be
allowed to fall freely;
(C) Below any platform; or
(D) In discotheques, cockpits, night and day clubs, casinos,
gambling joints and places of vice or where frivolity prevails.
iv. To wear the flag in whole or in part as a costume or uniform;
v. To add any word, figure, mark, picture, design, drawings,

advertisement, or imprint of any nature on the flag;
vi. To print, paint or attach representation of the flag on handkerchiefs,

napkins, cushions, and other articles or merchandise;
vii. To display in public any foreign flag, except in embassies and other
diplomatic establishments, and in offices of international organizations; and
viii. To use, display or be part of any advertisement or infomercial.
2. THE NATIONAL PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM
a. The National anthem, Lupang Hinirang, shall always be sung in the

national language within or outside the country. The following shall be the lyrics of
the National Anthem:
Bayang magiliw,
Perlas ng Silanganan
Alab ng puso,
Sa Dibdib mo’y buhay.
Lupang Hinirang,
Duyan ka ng magiting,
Sa manlulupig,
Di ka pasisiil.
Sa dagat at bundok,
Sa simoy at sa langit mong bughaw,
May dilag ang tula,
At awit sa paglayang minamahal.
Ang kislap ng watawat mo’y
Tagumpay na nagniningning,
Ang bituin at araw niya,
Kailan pa ma’y di magdidilim,
Lupa ng araw ng luwalhati’t pagsinta,
Buhay ay langit sa piling mo,
Aming ligaya na pag may mang-aapi,
Ang mamatay nang dahil sa iyo.
b. The rendition of the National Anthem, whether played or sung, shall be in

accordance with the musical arrangement and composition of Julian Felipe.


211
c. When the National Anthem is played at a public gathering, whether by a
band or by singing or both, or reproduced by any means, the attending public shall
sing the anthem. The singing must be done with fervor.
d. As a sign of respect, all persons shall stand at attention and face the
Philippine flag, if there is one displayed, and if there is none, they shall face the band
or the conductor. At the first note, all persons shall execute a salute by placing their
right palms over their left chests. Those in military, scouting, citizen military training
and security guard uniforms shall give the salute prescribed by their regulations. The
salute shall be completed upon the last note of the anthem.
e. The anthem shall not be played and sung for mere recreation, amusement
or entertainment purposes except on the following occasions:
i. International competitions where the Philippines is the host or has a

representative;
ii. Local competitions;
iii. During the “signing off” and “signing on” of radio broadcasting and
television stations;
iv. Before the initial and last screening of films and before the opening of
theater performances; and
v. Other occasions as may be allowed by the National Historical Institute
(NHI).
3. THE NATIONAL MOTTO
The National Motto shall be “MAKA-DIYOS, MAKA-TAO, MAKAKALIKASAN

AT MAKABANSA.”
4. THE NATIONAL COAT-OF-ARMS
The National Coat-of-Arms shall have: Paleways of two (2) pieces, azure and
gules; a chief argent studded with three (3) mullets equidistant from each other; and,
in point of honor, avoid argent over all the sun rayonnant with eight minor and lesser
rays. Beneath shall be the scroll with the words “REPUBLIKA NG PILIPINAS,”
inscribed thereon.
5. THE GREAT SEAL
a. The Great Seal shall be circular in form, with the arms as described in the
preceding section, but without the scroll and the inscription thereon. Surrounding the
whole shall be a double marginal circle within which shall appear the words
“Republika ng Pilipinas.” For the purpose of placing The Great Seal, the color of the
arms shall not be deemed essential but tincture representation must be used.
b. The Great Seal shall also bear the National Motto.
c. The Great Seal shall be affixed to or placed upon all commissions signed
by the President and upon such other official documents and papers of the Republic
of the Philippines as may be provided by law, or as may be required by custom and
usage. The President shall have custody of the Great Seal.


212
6. OFFICIAL SEAL AND OTHER HERALDIC ITEMS AND DEVICES
a. Any government entity, including the military, may adopt appropriate coat-
of- arms, administrative seals, logo, insignia, badges, patches, and banners; and
initiate awards, citations, orders or decorations; as may be authorized by Congress
or the Office of the President.
b. Such heraldic devices and items shall be filed with the National Historical
Institute (NHI) for recording and evaluation as to precedence, design, customs and
traditions. The NHI shall promulgate the corresponding rules and regulations which
shall be submitted for approval to the Office of the President or to Congress.
c. All government offices including the military are to purchase all heraldic
items and devices from manufacturers accredited and authorized by the NHI. Such
items and devices shall be subject to inspection by the purchasing agency’s internal
inspector and the COA representatives using the design and specifications approved
by the Office of the President or by the Congress, through the NHI.
d. No government official or employee shall accept any order or decoration

from any foreign government without the consent of Congress, and without the prior
evaluation and documentation of such order or decoration by the NHI.
SECTION E
IMMUNITIES AND PRIVILEGES, DIPLOMATIC
VEHICLES, AND RESIDENCES AND OFFICES
1. IMMUNITIES and PRIVILEGES
a. Conventions on Diplomatic Immunities and Privileges
The status, rights, privileges and immunities of members of the diplomatic and
consular staff and household are governed by the 1961 Vienna Convention on
Diplomatic Relations and the 1963 Vienna Convention on Consular Relations.
Officers and employees assigned abroad should be thoroughly acquainted with the
provisions of these Conventions.
b. Customs Privileges
While basic rules and practices on customs privileges are universally

established by the Conventions, supplementary regulations may vary among
countries.
c. Offenses against Diplomats
In the Philippines, offenses committed against an accredited diplomat are

legally considered as criminal acts. Sec. 6 of Republic Act No. 75, s.1946, provides:
“Any person who assaults, strikes, wounds, imprisons or in any manner offers


213
violence to the person of an ambassador or a public minister, in violation of the law
of nations, shall be imprisoned for not more than three years, and fined not
exceeding two hundred pesos, in the discretion of the court, in addition to the
penalties that may be imposed under the Revised Penal Code.”
2. PHILIPPINE RULES ON DIPLOMATIC MOTOR VEHICLES
a. Importation of Motor Vehicles
Except as may be otherwise be provided for in reciprocal arrangements, only

one car for the official use of the head of mission, to be registered in the name of the
Embassy or Mission, shall be allowed to be imported or purchased tax-free and duty-
free.
Each Mission or Embassy is allowed to import or purchase tax-free and duty-

free, depending upon the size of each mission, not more than five motor vehicles for
official use.
b. Importation for Personal Use
i. Heads of Posts, during each tour of duty, may import or purchase for
personal use not more than two motor vehicles tax-free and duty-free.
ii. Other consular officers, except honorary consular officials, during

each tour of duty, may import or purchase locally for personal use one (1)
motor vehicle tax-free and duty-free.
iii. Administrative and other staff members of the diplomatic missions

and consular establishments, including Filipino citizens and permanent
residents and those who do not have diplomatic or consular officer status, are
not entitled to import motor vehicles tax- free and duty-free.
c. Replacement of Motor Vehicles
Replacement of motor vehicles by means of imparting or purchasing tax-free

and duty-free vehicles shall be allowed only after three (3) years from the date of
registration of the motor vehicle to be replaced.
In any case the old vehicle is sold to a non-privileged buyer, taxes and duties
must be paid thereon, based on the value assessed at the time of sale to the non-
privileged buyer.
d. Disposal of Motor Vehicle
When the owner of a motor vehicle which was imported tax-free and duty-
free is transferred to another station before the end of the three-year period, the car
may be re-exported or sold to another person who has the same privilege of
importing or purchasing a motor vehicle tax-free and duty-free.


214
e. Sale of Tax-Exempt Motor Vehicle
Any sale to any person or entity of any motor vehicle imported tax-free and
duty-free should be reported to the Department and the corresponding license plates
should be surrendered to the Department.
3. RESIDENCE AND OFFICES OF FILIPINO DIPLOMATS ABROAD
a. Place of Residence
Diplomatic officers and employees shall, as a rule, establish their residence at

the seat of the mission. With the approval of the Secretary of Foreign Affairs,
however, they may establish temporary residence at a place other than the seat of
the mission, if conveniently near it, and within the country where the mission is
located. Consular officers and employees shall reside within the consular districts to
which they are assigned and as near as practicable to the office.
b. Selection of Offices and Quarters
Offices as well as residential quarters for diplomatic and consular officers

shall be as presentable and dignified as the appropriations therefor permit.
Except in combined offices, consular offices shall be as centrally and conveniently
located as possible preferably in the business districts.
c. Coat of Arms
The coat of arms of the mission shall be placed above or by the principal
entrance of the residence of the Head of Mission and of the chancery, unless such
arrangement is not practicable or is in conflict with local customs. The same rule is
applicable to consular offices and residences.
d. Acquisition of Property for Office and Residential Quarters
Without in any way placing the Philippine Government under obligation, the
feasibility shall be explored for acquiring ownership of real estate to house the
chancery or the consular office and the residence of the Head of Mission or the Head
of Consular Post and possibly of the other personnel, in lieu of the general practice
of paying rental on leased properties.
e. Office Plan
Diplomatic and consular offices shall be so planned that visitors shall enter
first a waiting room or public reception room where an information or reception clerk
shall be placed on constant duty during office hours.
In diplomatic missions, the consular section shall as much as practicable be
separated from the rest of the mission. If the mission occupies a building of more
than one floor, the consular section should be on the first floor.


215
SECTION F
CALLS AND SOCIAL FUNCTIONS
1. CALLS
a. Upon Entrance to Duty
Calls are made in accordance with local practice. This can be ascertained
from the Dean of the Diplomatic Corps, upon whom the Ambassador calls soon after
the presentation of his credentials.
b. Arranging Calls for Diplomatic and Consular Officers
A Head of Mission desiring to make a call on the Head of State, the Minister
of Foreign Affairs or any other ranking official of the receiving Government shall
ordinarily course his request through the Chief of Protocol of the Foreign Office. The
same rules apply to calls by subordinate diplomatic officers on officials of the Foreign
Office or other offices of the receiving Government. Subordinate officers do not,
however, ordinarily call on officers of much higher category and rank than theirs.
Calls of consular officers are arranged directly with the officer concerned.
c. Making and Returning Calls
A courtesy call should be made promptly at the appointed time. It should

generally not exceed fifteen minutes, unless the parties manifestly desire to prolong
it. Calls made by officers of equal or superior rank shall be returned, but calls of
officers of lower rank may be merely acknowledged by leaving cards at the latter’s
offices. As a matter of courteous consideration, however, a call of an officer of lower
rank may be returned. Calls should be returned within a week or, at most, ten days.
d. Calls among Diplomatic Ladies
Inquiries with the local Protocol Office should be made as to what calls should
be made by wives of the Head of Mission on wives of officials of the receiving
Government or members of the Diplomatic Corps.
e. Calling Cards – The following forms may be used for official calling cards
(5.5 X 9 cms):


216
Less formal cards may indicate the address and telephone number at the bottom,
thus:
2. SOCIAL FUNCTIONS
a. Invitations to Subordinate Officers
Invitations issued by the Head of Mission to his subordinate officers and

employees to official social functions partake of the nature of official orders and may
not be declined, except for unavoidable reasons. Subordinate officers shall arrive
earlier than the other guests to assist the Head of Mission in their entertainment.
b. Form of Invitations
Invitations to special occasions, such as the national holiday reception, shall

be specially printed with the seal of the Republic of the Philippines at the middle- top.
Invitations to less formal occasions may be made on printed forms with blanks left to
be filled with the name of the invitee, the time, place, and, if desired, the purpose of
the invitation at the space at the top. Invitations shall be issued in the name of the
Head of Mission and his wife, if she is present at the post.
c. Accepting Invitations
R.S.V.P. invitations shall be answered as soon as conveniently practicable.

The answer must be categorical and never conditional or indefinite.
d. Greeting the Head of Mission
Personnel of the Foreign Service establishment shall greet their Head of

Mission and the latter’s spouse in any ceremony or social gathering even though
they had seen the latter shortly earlier.


217
e. Guest of Honor and Other Guests
To avoid difficulties in seating arrangements in a formal party, guests who

outrank the guest of honor should, if possible, not be invited.
f. Place Cards
Place cards shall state only the simple titles of Heads of Mission and other
high ranking guests as “The Minister of Foreign Affairs” or “The Ambassador of
Spain”, but the surname shall be used on place cards for the wives, as “Mrs.
Romulo.”
g. Seating Arrangement
Under a single table arrangement, the guest of honor is always seated

immediately to the right of the host or hostess, and the next ranking guest
immediately to the left, and so forth. Ladies, as much as possible, should alternate
with gentlemen. Husbands and wives should not, as much as possible, be seated
side by side.
When two guests are of the same rank and one is of the same nationality as
the host, precedence shall be given the other.
A Head of Mission who is single may request the wife of a subordinate to be a

hostess for a social function although he may also make, in the alternative, the guest
of honor his co-host.
h. Use of Card for Certain Occasions
Cards are used for certain occasions to express felicitations, bid farewell, etc.,
proper abbreviated annotations being written in pencil on the lower left corner, as
follows:
p.p. – pour presenter (to introduce an official)
p.r. – pour remercier (to express thanks)
p.c. – pour consoler (to express condolence)
p.f. – pour feliciter (to extend felicitations)
p.p.c.– pour prendre conge (to take leave)
i. Dress
Officers shall see to it that they are properly dressed for each function or
ceremony. The dress desired is ordinarily indicated at the lower right hand corner of
the invitation card.
i. Full or evening dress or “white tie,” used by gentlemen for formal

evening functions, consists of:
(A) Black swallow tail coat with satin or fine grosgrain lapels;
(B) Black trousers with side braid along each outseam;
(C) White shirt with a stiff bosom;
(D) Wing collar and white bow tie;


218
(E) White waistcoat, single or double breasted, with or without

lapels;
(F) Black silk socks and black patent leather shoes;
(G) High silk top hat or opera hat and white buck-skin gloves;
and
(H) When necessary, black or dark blue overcoat with white silk
muffler.
ii. Dinner dress, ordinarily “black tie,” and more colloquially, “tuxedo,”
consists of the following:
(A) Black hip-length coat with silk or satin lapels;

(B) Black trousers with wide braid along each outseam (same as
full evening dress);
(C) White, stiff or pleated bosomed shirt; or a soft evening shirt
with studs instead of buttons;
(D) Turn-down, or attached collar and a black bow tie;
(E) Low-cut black waistcoat, unless coat is double breasted; and
(F) Opera hat or black homburg (usually the latter).
In the Philippines and other tropical countries, or in summer in

temperate places, the coat may be of white or light cream color.
iii. The morning dress or “cutaway” worn at formal functions held during
the day, consists of:
(A) Black or oxford-gray cutaway tailcoat, hanging open in front,

but without silk or satin lapels;
(B) Matching waistcoat or drove-gray double breasted waistcoat;
(C) Striped trousers, either gray and black or black with white
lines;
(D) White shirt with stiff front, or soft with stiff or semi-stiff collar;
(E) Turn-down collar being more often used than wing collar
even on formal occasions, and a gray or black and white
four-in- hand tie, or “ascot;”
(F) Black socks and shoes; and
(G) Top hat; or gray homburg on certain occasions if the gray
cutaway is worn.
j. Meeting and Seeing-off Officials
A Head of Mission shall ordinarily meet and see-off the Head of State and the
Secretary or Minister of Foreign Affairs when any of them leaves for, or arrives from,
other countries. The wife of the Head of Mission shall ordinarily be present when the
official arriving or departing is accompanied by his wife.
A Head of Mission shall also meet and see-off important official personages
coming from, or going to the Philippines on official missions.


219
k. Leaving Post
A Head of Mission, upon leaving his post, on termination of his tour of duty,
personally bids farewell to the Head of the State, the Chief of the Foreign Office, to
other Heads of Mission and to close friends, he sends cards marked “p.p.c.” in
pencil.
SECTION G
NAMES, INTRODUCTIONS, AND ADDRESSING
OFFICIALS
1. WHICH NAME TO USE
a. Use the conservative approach, i.e., title followed by the last name, if
spoken. In writing, note the different variations in different countries and cultures:
i. In the Philippines and most countries the order is: first name/s, middle
name (maiden name of mother in males and single women, and family name
of husbands in married women), and the last (family) name.
Examples: Juan Villa Cruz, Christine Guzman Santiago
Note that in the Philippines, especially among women professionals, it is also

becoming popular to have a hyphenated family name containing both the
maiden family name of the woman and her husband’s family name.
Example: Gloria Macapagal-Arroyo
Note also that in the Philippines it is common to see “Ma.” in names of

women, e.g. Ma. Erlinda Romero, sometimes even men, Jose Ma. Roque.
This is an abbreviated form of “Maria”, a common first name in the country.
ii. Among the Chinese, or people of Chinese descent, the order is

reversed – last name followed by the first name.
Example: Yao Ming, Lee Kuan Yew
iii. Among the Indians – name + s / o or d / o

(Rajiv don of India)
Priyanba Daughter of Sonia
iv. Malaysian – name + bint or binte

(Ahmad bint Abdullah)
(Fatima binte Maryam)
Note: It is always advisable to learn the local culture and practice pertaining to the
use of names to properly address people.


220
2. It is always a sign of respect and courtesy to remember the names of people and
to be able to say or write them correctly. This is the first step towards establishing
friendships and goodwill with other people, whether in formal or informal
circumstances.
In official documents, memoranda, correspondence, and invitations, it is

essential to get the names right.
a. If you forget the name of the person you are speaking to, politely say
“Could you please repeat your name for me so I could get it right.” (If you still
can’t remember, you can say, “Before I excuse myself, please tell me your name
again.”) Or “I am sorry, but could I get your name again.”
OTHER ALTERNATIVES IF MEMORY FAILS YOU
There are other tactful ways of saving yourself without the other person
knowing that at the moment you have no idea what he/she is called.
Ø If you encounter someone who greets you warmly but whose name or
face you can’t recall, stall.
Ø Return the person’s greetings.
Ø Then let him/her do the talking, listening attentively and at the same
time trying to remember his/her name.
Ø Sometimes the conversation will give you a clue as to the person’s

identity.
Ø In the meanwhile, try to appear as if you remember him/her as well.
Ø You can ask for a calling card or simply ask “What do they call you for
short?” if the occasion permits.
Ø If you cannot recall the person’s name and the conversation continues
longer than you expected, sometimes it is better to ask the person
apologetically and politely to remind you of his name rather than
calling him by a name that you are not sure is his.
b. Dealing with Uncommon Names
Ø Take extra care in pronouncing someone’s name if it is uncommon or

difficult to pronounce.
Ø To ask that person to check your pronunciation of his/her name or to

inquire about the correct way of saying it is appropriate and a
compliment to that person.
Ø Never make fun of another person’s name or ask how he or she ever
came to be called that way. This is rude and inconsiderate.


221
Ø Be sensitive to one who is trying to pronounce a difficult name. Inform
him/her of the proper way to say your name.
Ø If someone mispronounces your name, correct the other person

immediately and gently.
Ø To make light of the situation so as not to embarrass the other, you

can tell some anecdotes on the difficulty people have had with your
name.
c. When you greet people you have not seen in a long time or those you don’t
usually encounter, it is polite to identify yourself immediately.
Example: “How are you Mr. Cruz? I’m David Singson, we attended a
conference together a couple of months ago.”
”I’m Ric Suarez. Mrs. Santos, We go to the same gym.”
3. MAKING INTRODUCTION
a. Introducing people to each other
i. The proper protocol in introducing people to each other is guided by

considering their sex, age and rank, thus, introduce:
Ø a man to a woman;
Ø a younger person to an older woman, also single women are
introduced to married women and the younger one is introduced to
the older one;
Ø a lower ranking person to a higher-ranking person.
Example: “Alice may I introduce Ric Cortazar”

then say to the man:
”Ric I would like you to meet Alice Cruz.”
However, if Ric is a person occupying a high rank (say President of a

company) than Alice, the position should be considered first.
Example: “Mr. Cortazar, may I present Alice Cruz.”

”Alice, this is Mr. Cortazar, President of the company.”
Ø Should a person join a group, it is easier to say:
Example: “I would like you all to meet Gerry Alonzo.”

”Gerry meet Diane Santos, Patricia Noble, and Nena Ortiz.”
Ø Introduce newcomer first to the group and then the group, usually at
random, without observing priorities, if all are more or less of equal
ranking.


222
Ø However, should the group include people of rank, it is best to

introduce the newcomer, to the people of higher rank.
Example: “Your Excellency, Mr. Ambassador this is Gerry Alonzo.”
Ø Rulers of countries, church dignitaries and chiefs of delegations

representing a country are always given the higher priority when
people are introduced to them.
4. OTHER RULES ON INTRODUCTION
a. When you are doing the introductions, make sure to speak clearly and
pronounce the names carefully and correctly. It is also polite to look at the persons
you are speaking to. It is accepted to provide descriptions about the persons you are
introducing, especially if it is relevant to the conversation. Observe professional titles,
such as Doctor or Attorney, when introducing people. (Be careful with the use of the
title DOCTOR, even if the person has a doctorate degree (PhD). This is usually
appropriate only for Doctors of medicine.)
b. In the Philippines, titles such as Senator, Governor, Ambassador,

Congressman, etc. are retained even though the person’s term of office may have
ended.
c. Some suggested words of introductions are:

“Madam... may I present...” (man’s name)
“Sir... may I present...” (a younger person’s name)
“May I introduce...”
“I have great pleasure in introducing...” (Name of guest speaker).
d. When you are being introduced it is always advisable to smile and

acknowledge both the person making the introduction and the person/s being
introduced to you. Should a man be seated, it is polite for him to stand up shake
hands with other men and bow slightly to the women unless they offer to shake his
hand. Shaking hands with the person you are meeting for the first time is already
acceptable in most countries. However, when a man and a woman are being
introduced to each other, it might be more prudent for the man to wait for the woman
to extend her hand first. It is also prudent for a man not to address a woman by her
first name or nickname unless she indicates that she wishes him to do so, this is
especially true for formal occasions and business meetings.
e. When being introduced you may politely say “How do you do?” or “How are
you?” You may also want to repeat the other person’s name to help you remember it:
“How do you do, Mr. Bautista?” . A warm “Hi”, “Hello”, or “Good afternoon (or
whatever is appropriate)”, is also acceptable. Avoid using lines such as: “My
pleasure”, “Charmed, I’m sure”, ”Delighted to make your acquaintance”. These are
unnatural and trite responses. You may say instead “I’m glad to meet you.” Or “I’ve
heard so much about you.” But say these only if you really mean them. Should the
person introducing you mispronounce your name, or provided incorrect information
about you, point out the error immediately and set it right. Do this politely without
offending or embarrassing the person introducing you.


223
f. There is nothing improper about introducing yourself to others, but do it
politely and courteously. Timing is very important, especially if you are to interrupt a
group of people in the middle of a conversation. Make sure that the group is
receptive to your approach by making eye contact and offering a smile. Always be
friendly in your approach and when necessary say: “excuse me”. When introducing
yourself, state both your first and last names and avoid using “mister” or “miss” or
any other title or honorific. If it is relevant to the conversation or you need to indicate
what you do, simply state it: “I am Ricardo Cruz, I am a lawyer...” or “Good evening, I
am Christina Santos, Second Secretary of the Philippine Embassy in New Delhi...”
g. Introductions are not always necessary. For instance, if you are walking
with a group and you chance upon a person you know, it is not necessary to make
introductions even if you talk briefly to that person. Also when eating out with a group
and a friend or acquaintance passes by your table, you are under no obligation to
present him to the group.
h. It is prudent to consider that there might be local and cultural variations

when making introductions. It is always wise to know the local practice and to follow
them to avoid any misunderstanding.
5. HANDSHAKE
a. In handshakes, the proper precedence are: Ø The person of authority

extends his/her hands first. Ø A woman extends her hand to a man. Ø A dignitary of
the church extends his hand to a woman. Ø An elder woman extends her hand first
to a younger woman.
b. Always shake hands with your right hand. In some cultures, shaking hands
using the left hand is considered very impolite.
c. Always accept a gesture of handshake. It is considered rude and

disrespectful to ignore or refuse an offer of handshake.
d. If you are holding a drink, especially during cocktails, hold it with your left
hand so that your right hand is always free to shake hands when your are introduced
to somebody.
e. If your hands are both full, say with a drink on one hand and an appetizer
on the other, and a person extends his hand to you, just politely say “It is so nice to
meet you, excuse me (or forgive me) but my hands are full.” Make sure, however, to
extend a gesture of handshake to that person if another opportunity arises and if it
still appropriate, e.g., before you leave or before that person leaves.
f. Shaking hands is not only for introductions, it is also an appropriate gesture

when an agreement has been reached; when a meeting has been concluded; or
when saying goodbye in formal occasions and official functions.
g. Handshakes should be firm, but not too tight. It usually lasts no longer than
4 seconds. Always give a warm handshake, avoid being reluctant and hurried,
however, also avoid being over eager, and never exaggerate your handshake.


224
6. CARDS
a. Types of Cards
i. Calling Card
A calling card contains only the name and profession of the holder.
ii. Business Card
A business card contains the name, profession of the holder and other
information such as address and contact number of the holder.
b. Calling and Business Cards should always be formal. Fonts and font sizes
should be easy to read. Use standard white stationery and avoid colored stationeries
and those with decorations. Never use a scented card. Avoid putting pictures or
unnecessary graphics, such as borders, drawings, and other art works.
c. Remember that Cards serve many purposes. Aside from giving a new
acquaintance a ready reference or guide in pronouncing your name, they are utilized
in informal greetings or conveying informal messages. This is done by simply writing
in pencil on the left hand corner of the card accepted French abbreviations, such as:


225
p.r. – pour remercier – to express thanks or appreciation
p.p. – pour presenter – to introduce or present somebody
p.c. – pour consoler – to convey sympathies or condolence
p.f. – pour feliciter – to congratulate or felicitate
p.p.c. – pour prendre congé – to take leave or say adieu
d. Timing is also important in giving your card. Sometimes, it is not advisable

to present your card immediately upon being introduced or when entering an office.
One should wait for the proper occasion. Remarks like “What sort of business are
you in?” or “I hear you are an investment broker, how do I reach you?” could
be the right moment to present a card.
e. In giving a card, always be polite and accompany it with a phrase like:

”May I give you my card in case I can be of help to you?”
f. When someone offers you a card, take it with your right hand. Glance at it
and put it in a pocket or in handbag after a little while. Never put a card in your
pocket or handbag without reading its content, this is considered as rude.
g. In some cultures, like the Japanese and Chinese, you have to use both
hands, using thumb and forefinger, in handing your card. The name printed on the
card should face the receiver. Bow slightly as you hand the card to the person.
h. It is the same when receiving a card from a Japanese or Chinese, use both
hands, using thumb and forefingers, to receive card. Look at the card, read it to show
appreciation. Do not put the card away immediately. Wait for a little while before
putting card in your pocket or until giver has left. When you are seated and in front of
a table, it is also very polite to place the cards on the table for a while, or throughout
the duration of your conversation.


226
7. ADDRESSING OFFICIALS


227


228
Addressing Women
Addressing the Spouses of Officially Ranked People
USE ‘MADAME’ WHEN ADDRESSING A WOMAN FROM A FOREIGN COUNTRY
We call women in this country “Mrs.,” “Miss,” or “Ms.,” followed by a surname.

When we meet a woman from another country, we often have trouble catching a
complicated name, and we don’t know whether to call her “Miss” or “Mrs.” The
Solution is to call her simply “Madame.” French is the language of diplomacy
throughout the world, and “Madame” is almost as much of a catch-all as “Ms.” In the
American idiom.
Use “Madame” for a woman who is out of her teens or if you know for a fact
that she is married. It makes life very simple. You don’t have to say “Madame
Abdourahmane” when you’re taking with her. Just “Madame” will do.
“THE HONORABLE” – A TITLE OF RESPECT IN AMERICA
“The Honorable” in front of a person’s name is a title held for life by a person
who holds or has held high office at the federal, state, or city levels. However, there
is a nuance that must be remembered: A person who is addressed by others as “The
Honorable” should not put the title on her own business cards, a personal letterhead,
or on the invitations she extends. If, for example, an ex-official is now a partner in a
law firm, on firm’s stationery his name would be listed with the other partners with
“The Honorable” before it, but if it his stationery alone, his name should not bear that
honorific. In other words, it is a distinction bestowed by someone else on a person,
not by the person on himself.


229
The following are among those who carry “The Honorable” title through their
lives:
The President and the Vice President

Cabinet members, Deputy Secretaries, Undersecretaries, and Assistant
Secretaries
Presidential Assistants
American career and appointed ambassadors
American representatives (including alternates and deputies) to international
organizations
The Chief Justice of the Supreme Court, associate justices, judges of other
courts
All members of Congress
The Secretary of the Senate; the clerk of the House
The sergeants at arms of the Senate and House
Librarian of Congress
Comptroller General (General Accounting Office)
Heads, assistant heads, and commissioners of U.S. government agencies
Governor and lieutenant governor of a state
Secretary of State, Chief Justice, and attorney general of a state
State treasurer, comptroller, or auditor State senator, representative,
assemblyman, or delegate
Mayor
Members of the city council, commissioners, etc.
In addressing an invitation to a married woman who is in office and whose

husband has no rank, her name proceeds his:
The Honorable Julia Rosen and Mr. Geoffrey Rosen

Address
When she is no longer in office, she still retains “The Honorable,” but her
name returns to its place after her husband’s:
Mr. Geoffrey Rosen and The Honorable Julia Rosen

Address
THE BRITISH: OUR FRIENDS WITH MANY TITLES
Since we do much business with Great Britain, it is important for those having
a great deal of contact with the country to understand its layers of leadership: the
Crown, the government, and the peers of the realm.
Protocol for the Royal Family is carefully prescribed, and even though
philosophically we do not adhere to the principles of a monarchy, we should respect
our British friends’ admiration for it. It is impossible to please the British in their own
country and to please British business people visiting here if we are totally
unknowledgeable about their country’s history or the Crown.


230
THE ROYAL FAMILY
One does not write directly to a member of the Royal Family; write to “The
Private Secretary to...”
Her Majesty the Queen

His Royal Highness, Prince Philip, The Duke of Edinburgh
His Royal Highness, The Prince Charles, Prince of Wales
Her Royal Highness, The Princess Ann (married to Commodore Timothy
Lawrence of the Royal Navy)
His Royal Highness, The Prince William
His Royal Highness, The Prince Harry
His Royal Highness, The Duke of York
Her Royal Highness, The Duchess of York
His Royal Highness, The Prince Edward (married to Sophie Reese Jones,
The Countess of Wessex)
If you are fortunate enough to be invited to tea by Her Majesty the Queen, your
invitation will come from her Master of the Household, and it might read as follows:
The Master of the Household

is Commanded by Her Majesty to invite
[your name written on this line]
to an Afternoon Party at Buckingham Palace
th
on Tuesday, February 4 from four to six o’clock


231


232


233
Diplomatic Protocol with Other Nations
Writing to Officials of Foreign Republics
When you write to officials of a foreign republic, follow the style give in this table of
the country of France.


234
MILITARY RANK
The Army, Air Force, and Marine Corps have the following commissioned officers
according to rank:
General Lieutenant
General Major
General Brigadier
General
Colonel
Lieutenant Colonel
Major
Captain
First Lieutenant
Second Lieutenant
The Navy and Coast Guard have the following:
Admiral
Vice Admiral
Rear Admiral
Captain
Commander
Lieutenant Commander
Lieutenant
Lieutenant, junior grade
Ensign


235


236


237
SECTION H
HOSTING SOCIAL EVENTS
The most common social events in diplomatic life are cocktail parties, formal
dinners, vin d’ honneur, luncheon, and teas.
1. RECEPTION LINE
a. At formal receptions, there is usually a receiving line to give each guest the
opportunity to greet the Host, Hostess and Guests of Honor. When entertaining in
honor of distinguished guests, the following receiving line are recommended:
i. Host, Guest of Honor, Host’s Wife, Wife of the Guest of Honor

ii. Host, Guest of Honor, Wife of the Guest of Honor, Hostess
b. It is also customary to announce the arrival of guests. This is usually done

either by the Protocol Officer, Military Attaché or a Junior Official. It is also useful to
have one or more Junior Officers standing near the end of the line.
c. At National Day receptions, the receiving line may include the Deputy Chief
of Mission (DCM) and his wife after the Chief of Mission (CM) and his wife.
d. The receiving line at the reception or cocktail party should be kept as short
as possible. A long receiving line tends to slow down a reception and serves no
useful purpose.


238
e. At the end of the function, when the guests depart, the order of the
reception line is reversed.
2. TOAST
a. Toasting is a graceful means of expressing good feelings and sentiment to

an Honoree county. Thus, it is acceptable in almost all social functions such as Vin d’
honneur, National Day receptions, official dinners and luncheons, cocktail
receptions,
b. The toast is usually done either before or after dessert. A toast is usually
preceded by a remark by the Host, after which the Host invites other guests to join
him in a toast. The Honoree then responds with his own remarks and invites the
guests for another toast.
c. In diplomatic functions, toasts are usually made for a country, the Head of
State or Government, and, as with other functions, the Host and Honoree. A toast
can also refer to the healthy cooperation and good relations between countries and
governments.
d. It is customary toast with wines, but other beverages are also acceptable,
especially in countries where wines or other alcoholic drinks are prohibited.
e. Sample of a very simple toast:

My friends
A toast to the Republic of the Philippines
To (name of person being toasted)
For his health, happiness and good fortune
To everyone here present and
To people of goodwill everywhere
Mabuhay (the audience takes their sips first before the person offering
a toast)
3. FOOD, DRINKS, and DINING
a. Cocktails, Wines, and Liquor
i. Different glasses are used for different drinks during parties and
dinners. For cocktails like martinis, stingers, Manhattan, sidecars, and the like,
cocktail glasses are used. These are stemmed glasses designed to keep the
heat of the hand from the chilled content. Glasses for wines are also stemmed
for the same purpose. For liquors which can be served “on-the-rocks”, i.e. with
ice, such as scotch or vodka, tumblers or old-fashioned glasses are used. For
tall drinks such as gin and tonic, scotch with soda, bourbon with ginger ale,
Singapore sling, or any other drink requiring a glass with more volume,
highball glasses are used.
The following illustrates the different glasses and the drinks which they are used for:


239
ii. Most common cocktails include: Martini, Sidecar, Whisky sour,

Alexander, Daiquiri, Manhattan, Gin and Tonic, Singapore sling, Tom Collins,
Sangria, Margarita. There are also a wide variety of wines, but there are
basically three categories: Red, White, and Rose wines.
iii. If you are hosting a cocktail party in your residence, it is advisable to

have the following beverages called “merry mixers”: Whisky, Rum, Gin,
Vodka, White wine, Red Wine, Tequila, Bourbon, Vermouth, Soda, Tonic
water, Limejuice, Beer, Soft drinks, and fruits juice. You should also have
some orange slice, cherries, onion pearls, assorted nuts, cocktail napkins,
and toothpicks.
4. FORMAL DINNER
a. Dinner requirements
i. China show plates: dinner plates, salad plates, soup plates,

and bread plates (finer than those used for daily meals). Show plates
are usually silver or brass, capiz or wood to be placed directly under
the dinner plates.
ii. Silvers or cutlery: fork, knives, spoons, usually of silver,
although high quality stainless may be used.
iii. Glasses
iv. Linen: Tablecloth, napkins, placemats, table runners, doily.
v. Optional accessories: candelabra, salt and peppershakers,
place card holders, ashtrays, hostess bell.
vi. Table centerpiece (usually flower or fruits).
vii. Seating diagram, place cards, and finger bowls.


240
b. Seating Arrangements
i. For Round Table
H- Host
LH- Lady Host
GH- Guest of Honor
LGH- Lady Guest of Honor
Entertainment Seating Arrangements
ii. For Rectangular Table
iii. Rectangular Table of Eight
GH- Gentleman of Honor

LH- Lady of Honor


241
iv. Round Table of Eight
GH
v. When Dining out
Tables of Ten


242
Seating at a U-shaped Table
Seating at the Head Table


243
Multi-Table Arrangements
c. Table Setting
i. Formal Table Setting


244
ii. Everyday Dinner Setting
iii. Traditional Formal Service


245
iv. Classic Formal Service
v. Royal Service


246
vi. Table Setting: Some Basic Guidelines
Ø Forks are placed tines up on the left side of the dinner plate. The
oyster fork, if needed, is also placed on the left.
Ø Spoons with their bowls facing up are placed on the right side of
the dinner plate. The soup spoon (with a large rounded head and loops
heavy) is the only spoon on the table.
Ø Knives are also placed on the right side of the dinner plate with
the blades facing the plate.
Ø The silvers or utensils for all courses are arranged so that the
diner picks up the farthest utensils on each side as different courses are
served.
Ø The first large glass to the right of the plate is the water goblet.
Ø The wine glasses are also set to the right above the dinner
plate.
Ø Use matching glasses for each wine.
Ø The dessert spoon is placed above the dinner plate.
Ø The salt and peppershaker are to the left of the dinner plate.
Ø The bread plate with the butter knife on it is placed to the left of
the dinner plate.
Ø After dinner, place the unfolded table napkin on the dinner plate.
While it is not necessary to fold the used table napkin, place it on top of
the dinner plate neatly.
Ø If you do not want your guests to smoke, do not put ashtrays on

the dinner table.
Ø Prepare a seating diagram and display it at the entrance to the

dining room for guests to know their place at the dinner table.
Ø Place cards are placed just above the dinner plates.
Ø If chocolates and mints will be served, put them in open bowls

between the candles and the centerpiece.
Ø A finger bowl with doily underneath is used at the meal’s end by

each guest. Put in cold water and a curl of lemon peel or flower décor in
the bowl.
Ø Coffee may be served at the table in demitasse cups, the

teaspoon lay on each saucer, and the cup’s handle is directed towards
the guest.


247
Ø Candles may be white or colored, but white or ivory candles are
preferable. Very elaborate candles with color or metallic ornamentation
are in poor taste and will detract the effect of the centerpiece. Candle
flames should be above eye level or well below. Candle is seldom used
in daytime.
Ø Do not overcrowd the table with ornaments, this will make

serving difficult and the table itself will look cluttered, making it less
attractive to the guests.
Ø Ensure proper lighting, if there is too little light, the food loses its
attractiveness since people like to see what they are eating. 4.5.
Menu 4.5.1. Standard Menu Ø Hors d’ oeuvres Ø Soup Ø Salad Ø Fish
course Ø Meat course Ø Fruits Ø Dessert Ø Coffee/Tea
d. Menu
i. Standard Menu
Optional items:
Ø Wines
Ø Sherbet
Ø Liqueur
Ø Brandy
Ø Chocolates
ii. Sample menu for a formal dinner
Ø Hors d’ oeuvres – shrimp cocktail

Ø Soup – beef consommé
Ø Fish course – tenderloin steaks with tossed green salad
Ø Dessert – cake
Ø Coffee or Tea
Ø Brandy/liqueur
iii. Sequence of food service
Ø Hors d’ oeuvres
Ø Bread / butter
Ø Soup
Ø Salad
Ø White wine


248
Ø Fish
Ø Sherbet
Ø Red wine
Ø Meat
Ø Fruits
Ø Dessert
Ø Tea / coffee
Ø Liqueur
Ø Brandy
Ø Chocolates
e. Dinner Service: Some Guidelines
Ø In a formal dinner, the service calls for a procedure of exchanging one

plate for another so the place in front of the guest is always clean until
dessert.
Ø Food is served from the left side of the guest and the plate is removed
from the right. The waiter or server removes the plate with the right hand.
Ø All service starts with the Lady Guest of Honor followed by all other
lady guests with the Hostess the last to be served among the ladies. Then the
male Guest of Honor is served and then the other gentlemen and finally the
Host.
Ø In a larger table, it is preferable to simultaneously serve the guests so

that food will be eaten while still hot.
Ø Dry crackers or dry toast and butter are usually served with the soup.
They are placed on the bread and butter plate.
Ø White wine should be properly chilled and is served first. It is then

poured into the wine glass prior to the next course. All wines are served from
the right of the diner.
Ø Salad is served after the soup or it may also before the meat course.
Ø The following should not be brought to the guests: thermos bottle of

hot water, bottle of instant coffee, or can of milk. Instead, have a special
container for instant coffee and a similar one for tea. Use silver or porcelain
coffee pot for hot water, a cream and sugar set and a small container for
lemon or calamansi. Calamansi should be wrapped individually in
cheesecloth.
Ø Water glasses are filled at intervals throughout the meal.
Ø Wines are poured before the courses and refilled when necessary.
Ø A tray of chocolate or mints are passed around after dinner amenities

are taking place. These are called “petit fours”.


249
5. DINNER ETIQUETTE
a. Napkin
Ø As soon as you sit down at the table, spread your napkin across your
leg. A regular sized napkin (16 inches square) must be completely unfolded; a
large dinner napkin (23 x 23 inches) should be only unfolded half. The napkin
should stay on the lap until you rise to leave the table.
Ø If you must leave the table during the meal, put the napkin on the seat
of the chair (not on the table).
Ø When dinner is over, fold the napkin neatly and leave it on the table to
the left of the plate. If using napkin rings, fold the napkins carefully and slip
them into their rings before leaving the table.
Ø Don’t use the napkin as a bib.
Ø A woman should not blot her lipstick on the napkin.
b. Saying grace
Ø If grace is to be said before the meal, follow your host’s lead. If the
host remains standing for the blessing of the food, you should do too.
Ø Don’t drink or eat anything before grace is said. Remain silent with
your head bowed until the end of the prayer. You may say Amen, then put
your napkin in your lap.
c. When to start eating
Ø The last person to be served is the host/hostess. Everyone at the

table should wait until the last person is served before starting to eat. An
exception to this is when the host urges the guests to begin eating at once as
soon as the food is served.
Ø If there is no hostess, then the woman guest of honor on the host’s

right should be the first one to begin eating. Everyone else will follow her.
d. Serving oneself from the platter
Ø All food bowls and platters are passed from the left.
Ø To serve yourself from a platter, take the serving fork in your left hand
and spoon in your right and scoop up the food in order to transfer them to your
plate.
Ø Leave the serving utensils lying neatly side by side in a manner that
makes it easy for the next person to serve himself.
Ø Take modest portions. This is true even in a buffet, if the food is
plentiful, you can always go back for more.


250
e. Special food preference
Ø If you have any reason (medical, religious, etc.) that would not allow
you to eat food normally served in parties, dinners or other formal meals, talk
it over your host prior to the event.
Ø If you are not able to talk to the host prior to the event, just politely
decline the food that is being served and discreetly explain to the host why
you could not partake of the food. Being discreet on this matter will avoid
embarrassment on the part of the host. Also avoid discussing the matter
during the meal, as this might make the other guests uncomfortable. Be
gracious not to draw attention to yourself so that the others can enjoy the
meal. Do not force the host to prepare special food for you if the event is
already going on, but if he insists and does prepare one, be sure to thank your
host.
Ø Help yourself with the other food that you could eat, this would be very
reassuring to the host.
f. Spilling
Ø If you spill anything that could be blot out with napkin, do so. For a
minor stain, such as drops of gravy or sauce, dab it and clean it as well as
possible with three or four pats of the napkin. Return the napkin to the lap
folded in such a way not to transfer the stain from the napkin to your clothes.
Ø In a restaurant, the host should call the waiter to clean up the spill.
Ø If you accidentally break a glass, or any dinnerware, or your spillage

ruined a tablecloth or any linen, sincerely apologize to your host. If the
dinnerware or linen is the personal property of the host, you can offer to
replace the damaged wares or linens.
Ø Apologize to the other guests for having spilled something. Do not,

however, prolong the apologies. The sooner the party gets back to normal,
with the accident forgotten, the better for everyone.
g. Positions of Implements
Ø When you pause from eating, put the fork, tines down, on the left side
of the plate and the knife, with blade facing inward, on the right. When dinner
is completely finished, put the knife, with blade facing inward, and fork next to
each other on the right side of the plate (as in American style).
Ø In the case of coffee or tea, lay the spoon on the under saucer, do not
leave it sticking up in the cup. Do not, however, lay the spoon in the soup
plate, leave it instead, in the soup bowl. In a tall glass of iced tea with a tall
spoon or stirrer, balance the stirrer on the under-saucer when not in use. If
there is no under saucer, the stirrer remains upright in your glass; grasp it
between your index and middle finger while you drink so that it does not fall
out of the glass.


251
h. Table Manners
Ø Always maintain good posture at table with your body straight in the
chair and feet together on the floor.
Ø When not eating, rest your hands on the table (with bottom of the
wrists balanced on the table’s edge) or leave your hands under the table on
your lap. Do not put your elbows on top of the table.
Ø Do not play with the utensils or with your food.
Ø Rather than reach across the table to grab something you like, ask the
person nearest to the item to pass it on to you. Remember to say “please”
when asking a favor and “thank you” once your favor has been granted.
Ø Do not pour salt and pepper over the food before you have even
tasted it. If the dinner or lunch is prepared by the host, do not ask for
condiments or sauces if none are provided, you may, however, do this in
restaurants.
Ø Cut your meat one piece at a time. Cut one small piece, then eat it
before cutting another.
Ø The only way to eat is quietly. Chew only small bites of food – and
swallow them with the mouth closed.
Ø Do not eat too fast. Swallow each mouthful before shoveling in the
next.
Ø Never speak when your mouth is full.
Ø Wipe as often as necessary your fingers and mouth with the napkin.
Ø You may mop the sauce remaining on your plate, spear a small piece
of roll of bread on your fork, squish it around in the sauce and then put it in
your mouth taking care not to let it drip on you. Don’t take a piece of bread in
your fingers and do the mopping up because that can be messy. Using the
bread on the fork is preferable.
Ø If you are served certain food that you dislike, either politely decline
or, if it is already on your plate, leave it untouched, but as much as possible
do try out all food that is served to you.
i. Soups
Ø The proper way of scooping soup is to tip your soup bowl on

plate away from you and spoon the soup away from you.
Ø Pick up your soup cup or bowl only after everything floating

around it – bits of meat, cheese, mushrooms, etc. – has been
consumed. Then and only then can you pick it up and take it to the last
sip.


252
Ø Soup must not be cooled by stirring, lifting with the spoon, or

blowing. If it is too hot, spoon the soup along the rim of the plate where it
cools faster.
Ø Take the soup soundlessly, without a slurp.
Ø If you take soup from a cup, you will need to wipe off your
mouth.
Ø Do not dunk a piece of bread or roll in the soup. If offered a

spoon and a bowl of breadcrumbs, serve yourself some on top of the
soup, if you desire, but only a very few.
Ø Never break the cracker into the soup, it will make it soggy.
Ø It is acceptable to tilt the soup plate backwards to get the

remaining soup. This is acceptable but it is best to leave a little on your
plate.
Ø Take your soup from the side of your spoon, not from the front,
as it is too large. Remove the soup plate from the right.
ii. American style of eating
Ø After cutting the meat, put the knife down on the plate, transfer
the fork to your right from the left, spear a piece of meat and then eat it.
Here there is a transfer of the fork after cutting, from the left hand to the
right hand.
iii. Continental style of eating
Ø Keep your fork in the left hand and convey the food to the mouth
after cutting a piece of meat. The knife remains in your right hand. Here
the fork is held in the left hand and the knife in the right hand all through
the meal. This is a much quieter, more graceful and more efficient way of
eating than the American way. There is no clattering that occurs as one
shifts the fork from the cutting positions in the left hand to the eating
position in the right, meanwhile laying the knife down on the plate each
time.
Ø The order of holding the utensils can be reversed if you are left-
handed.
iv. Eating Dessert
Ø Dessert is eaten more easily continental style.
Ø It is easier to eat almost any dessert by using two implements –

a fork and a spoon.
Ø Eat the dessert with the spoon in your right hand and use the


253
fork as a buttress on the left or do the opposite – spoon in your left hand
and fork in your right whichever is comfortable to you.
v. Eating specific food
Fish
Ø Filleted fish is easy to eat. If the fish is not filleted, however,

the technique is to insert the tip of the knife under the backbone,
slide the knife under the fishbone and then gently lift the fishbone
with the knife. Put it on the side of the plate. If the fish is served
with the head, cut it off first before you fillet the fish.
Pasta
Ø The easiest way to eat noodles or pasta is with the fork in

your left hand and the knife (or spoon) on the right. Twirl the
strands of pasta around the fork. Pile a small amount of pasta on
the fork and support by pushing the knife (or spoon) against it to
keep it intact. Then bring the fork to your mouth. (If you are left
handed, you can hold the fork with your right hand and the knife
with your left.)
Ø Some people use a piece of bread on the right hand as a

“pusher” to act like a spoon in keeping the noodles on the fork.
Ø Some people eat pasta without using the spoon as support.

This is perfectly fine. Just twine some noodles around the fork,
then, keep turning you fork around slowly until the strands are
rolled compactly around it and put it in your mouth.
Ø Mix the sauce and grated cheese before eating the pasta
dish. You may mop the last pasta sauce with a piece of bread
speared on your fork.
Ø Never cut the strands of pasta into pieces.
vi. Drinking wine and liquors
Ø Drinking wine is optional and politely refusing it is fine.
Ø Do not ask for a soft drink or beer unless it is offered.
Ø Hold the wine glass at its stem. Do not place the wine glass in
between your fingers nor cup it with your palm. Wines taste better if they
are chilled, and doing these with the wine glass will warm the wines
contained in them. Do these, however, with liquors, such as brandy, as
liquors taste better if they are warm.
Ø Brandies should occupy only 1⁄4 of the glass, never fill to the
brim. A brandy glass is held with the palm of the hands facing upwards
and the stem is caught between the third and fourth finger.


254
Ø Always drink moderately.
6. AFTER THE EVENT
Ø If you are the host, be sure to greet and thank your guests as they leave
the event.
Ø If you are a guest, be sure to thank your hosts before leaving the occasion.
After formal dinners, do not linger longer than is necessary unless the host insists
that you stay longer. On the other hand, if you have to leave earlier than the other
guests, politely apologize to the host and the other guests. A short explanation would
be reassuring to the host.
Ø It is also acceptable to send a note of thanks the day after the event.
SECTION I
ORGANIZING OFFICIAL FUNCTIONS
1. INVITATIONS
Invitations to special occasions such as National Day receptions shall be

printed with the seal of the Republic of the Philippines at the middle-top.
Invitations to less formal invitations shall be made on printed forms with blank
spaces left to be filled in with the name of the invitee, the time, and venue of the
event. The occasion for inviting shall be indicated at the upper left side of the corner
either printed or typewritten (or a slip of paper pasted).
Illustration of an Invitation
Formal invitations are phrased in the third person.


255
a. Wordings in an Invitation
i. To a person of higher rank – “Request the honor of...”
ii. To a person of equal or lower rank – “Request the pleasure of...”

– “Cordially invite”
b. RSVP – “Repondez sil vous plait” (answer if you please). Invitations to

receptions, garden parties, and teas do not require an answer unless a response is
requested.
c. When invitations are telephoned or issued verbally, cards reminding guests

of their acceptance are usually sent. Appropriate word “To remind you of...”
(Function/ Date/time)
d. An invitation from the President or Heads of State of host countries is not to

be refused. It is always appropriate to prioritize these invitations even if there you
have prior commitments.
e. Invitations from ranking officials and superiors should also, as much as

possible, be accepted.
f. There are only very few acceptable reasons for regretting an invitation,
especially from ranking officials and superiors. These are recent death in the family,
severe illness, or other emergencies. Appropriate wording: “Regret exceedingly
that an invitation of the President prevents their keeping their engagement
to...”; “Regret that owing to the recent death of...” or “Regret owing to the
severe illness of...”; “They will be unable to accept the very kind invitation of...
because of...”
g. Invitations must be conveyed through official channels such as the DFA,

the Embassy of Invitee in Manila, the Philippine Embassy in Invitee’s Country.
h. For meetings, an agenda is usually prepared and sent with the invitation.
For conferences, a schedule of day-to-day activities and the topics to be discussed
should be sent to the invitee.
i. Acceptance of invitation Wordings of Acceptance to an invitation: “The

Government of the Republic of the Philippines is pleased to accept the
invitation of ________________.”; “The Minister of _____________________
has the honor to accept the kind invitation of _______________________.”
j. Regret to invitation Wordings of Regrets to an invitation: “The Government

of the Philippines regrets the kind invitation of________________.”; “The
Minister of _________________ regrets being unable to accept the kind
invitation of ______________________.”
k. Acceptance or Regret to an invitation conveyed in same manner as the

original invitation, that is, through official channels.


256
2. HOSTING OFFICIAL VISITS AND CONFERENCES
a. Kind of visit/purpose of visit
i. Initial visit
ii. Return visit
iii. Conference
iv. State visit
b. Secretariat is responsible for the documentation of visit/conference, it is also

responsible for the overall management of the event, from the preparation to the actual
implementation.
Checklist for the Secretariat:
i. Delegation list
Official Delegates – names, titles, ranks, positions

Alternate delegates
Advisers
Accompanying family members
Accompanying support personnel
Personal Data
Health requirements
Food restrictions
Other information about Delegation
ii.Travel Itinerary and Flight Details
Chartered Flight / Carrier / Commercial Flight/Private Flight

Date of departure from place of origin
Date of Arrival
Time of Arrival
iii. Hotel Accommodations
Advance registration
Room assignment
Information kits at Guest’s Rooms
Flowers
Welcome drinks
Master list of Delegation members with room numbers
iv. Local transportation
Cars for Delegation, accompanying personnel

Escorts
Ambulance
v. Security requirements
Police escort
Security in Hotel


257
vi. Conference venue
Secretariat
Supplies
Communications and other logistics
Seating arrangements
Presidential tables or head table
Flags
Microphones and other equipment
vii. Arrival of Guests at Airport
Customs
Immigration
Quarantine
Reception at planeside
Flowers for Ladies / Garlands for Gentlemen
Introduction of receiving officials
Introduction of arriving guests
Assignment of Protocol Assistants to each Delegate
Collections of luggage and loading in Cars
viii. From Airport to Hotel
Itinerary
Escorts and security
ix. Arrival at hotel
Distribution of keys
Welcome drinks
Welcome by Hotel Manager
Flowers / Fruits in room
Information kit in Delegate’s Room
Escorting to Rooms
Demonstration on use of room facilities (if necessary)
Hot / cold water, TV monitor, etc.
Telephone connections
Note: Always allow guests to have a short rest in the room after arrival before
proceeding to any activity such as the welcome dinner.
x. Evening Activity
Welcome Dinner
Reception Line
Cocktails
Welcome speech by Host
Toast
Response by Chief Delegate
Return Toast


258
Exchange of gifts
Dinner proper
Evening entertainment
xi. First Day of Visit and Subsequent Days
Courtesy call on President (optional) or on appropriate official

Visit to Rizal Monument at the Luneta (optional)
Start of official program of visit. A separate program for
Spouses of Delegates may be prepared.
Arrival at Conference Venue
Flag Arrangement
Seating Arrangement
Principal guest
Other Delegation Members
Public / Gallery
Conference kit containing Conference documents
Conference Proper
Presentation of Country Papers
Simultaneous translation (if necessary)
Distribution of copies of Country Paper to Delegates
xii. Delegates consultation on side of meetings
xiii. Preparation / drafting of Conference Communiqué Press

Conference
xiv. Signing of Conference Communiqué
Alternate – bilateral treaty

Alphabetical order in French or English language of names of
participating countries – multilateral treaty.
xv. Closing ceremonies
Closing statement of Host

Closing statement of Chief Delegate
Media Coverage
Exchange of Decoration (optional)
xvi. Free Day (optional)
Sightseeing
Shopping
xvii. Departure
Advance check-in
Gather luggage
Motor to Airport
Airport Ceremony
Boarding Aircraft


259
xviii. Post conference activities by Host
Settle hotel bills

Clear Conference venue
Take out equipment
Prepare Conference report
Send appreciation letters to those who assisted in
visit/conference
SECTION J
ETIQUETTE FOR EVERYDAY SITUATIONS
1. BUSINESS AND OFFICE SETTINGS
a. In business, assume all superiors and associates (those of equal rank)

prefer to be addressed formally. The use of first names, however, is acceptable in
many organizations, especially among peers. It is also perfectly normal, for
employers, especially older ones, to call subordinates by first names provided this is
always done professionally. Subordinates should never call their bosses by their first
names, unless they have been given permission to do so. Even in such
circumstances this should be done with respect. To be more respectful, especially in
the Philippines, it is preferable to attach the customary “Sir” or “Ma’am” to the boss’
first name.
b. It is very important to maintain a professional demeanor in all official and

business situations. Never use foul language and avoid using slang words and
terminologies.
c. Meetings are very important in business, in the office, and especially in

diplomacy. Make sure to be prepared and prompt in attending meetings. It is
preferable to make an appointment if you would like to meet with or call on someone.
It is always an inconvenience to everyone involved if a meeting is cancelled,
especially on a very short notice, so unless it is necessary make sure that you keep
your commitments in participating in meetings.
d. Always be polite. Say “Thank you”, “Please” and “You’re welcome”. Be

pleasant in greeting people with “Good morning” or “Good afternoon” or other
appropriate greetings.
e. Maintain amicable relations with officemates.
f. Always be considerate of people around you. Avoid interrupting those who

are working.
g. Do not gossip. Stay away from office politics.
h. Always dress appropriately for office work.


260
i. Be professional by keeping your commitments.
j. Always follow office rules and regulations.
2. TELEPHONE ETIQUETTE
a. Answer a telephone call promptly and politely. Speak clearly and avoid
interrupting the caller if he is speaking.
b. Take the calls of your officemates if they are not present.
c. Have a paper and pencil ready for taking messages.
d. If you have to put a caller on hold, tell him why and thank him afterwards
for waiting. If the interruption will take a while, offer to call back and do call back.
e. Be polite enough to give the caller your undivided attention during

telephone conversations.
f. End the call properly, don’t abruptly end the conversation and put down the
phone. Let the caller hang up first.
g. For cellular phones or pagers, use the silent mode when you are in a
meeting or in a public place or event such as a cinema, concert, lecture, program,
presentation or a religious service.
h. It is also best to avoid entertaining calls during meetings and other

functions.
i. When you are talking with someone avoid reading messages from your
hand phone. If it cannot be avoided, excuse yourself. This is also true when dealing
with calls.
3. IN A RESTAURANT
a. The man walks ahead of the woman as they step into the restaurant to
direct her to their table. Although it is not necessary to open the door for a woman,
this gesture is still commonly acceptable and many consider this as polite.
b. Upon entering the restaurant, the man walks ahead of the woman to direct
her to their table. If there is a waiter at the entrance to attend to them, the man
should step back and allow the woman to enter before him.
c. On arriving at the table, the waiter or the man pulls out the chair for the
woman.
d. When a group enters a restaurant and when one of them sees people
he/she knows but whom the rest may not be familiar with, the person should merely
nod or briefly greet his/her acquaintances while proceeding with the group to their
table. Should it be necessary to make introductions, the man at the table must stand
when presented to women. Women may remain seated when being introduced to
other people.


261
e. A woman’s seat in a restaurant is determined by the view the location
provides. She should be given the seat that allows her to see and appreciate the
view outside. Otherwise, she should have the seat from where she may look out into
the main dining room of the restaurant. She should not be seated where passing
people or a swinging door may hit her or where she has to face a wall.
f. When two couples eat out together, the women take the wall seats, while
the men occupy the aisle seats. The man should be seated facing the woman.
g. Where a younger pair is out with an older pair, the older couple sits on the
wall seats. When a woman is in the company of two men, she should be seated
between them.
h. The proper way to call a waiter to your table is to catch his eye and make a
signal such as raising your hand for him or her to come over. Do not attract
unnecessary attention to yourself by clapping your hands, whistling or calling out
“pssst” to your waiter. These are rude habits.
i. The host begins to settle the account with the restaurant. Call the waiter
and ask him/her for the bill. A simple statement “check please” will do. If the waiter is
at a distance, you can make a small card gesture designating the bill.
j. Upon receiving the bill, the host could look over it and should everything be
in order, the host returns the bill with the payment. If there is a mistake, raise it over
quietly to the waiter’s attention.
k. Tipping is optional as most restaurants include a service charge in your

check. In many countries the usual tip is around 10% of the total charge. You may
also tip through your credit card. Fill in the space for tip with the amount you want to
leave for your waiter.
4. ON THE ESCALATOR
a. Always occupy the right side of the moving stairway if you are not in the
rush. Leave the left side free for those who are in a hurry to stride through it.
b. If you are with a group, each of you should occupy only one step in the
escalator and stand behind one another.
5. ON THE ELEVATOR
a. Avoid talking out loud and attracting attention.

b. Give way to passengers who are stepping out.
c. Never smoke inside the elevator.
d. When you find yourself standing nearest the control panel of the elevator
and other passengers could not easily reach it, be gracious enough to ask
what floor they are headed and press the button for them.


262
6. AT THE CONCERT, PLAYS AND BALLETS
a. If you are the host or invited some guests to such events, make sure that
their tickets and other arrangements are in order. It is best to accompany them until
they are seated or, when ushers are available, endorse them to an usher. The host
always lets his guests walk ahead of him.
b. When a man accompanies a woman to a theater, the man should take the
aisle seat. If two couples are attending such events, together, one man should enter
their row of seats first, then the women follow and the other man would be the last to
take his seat.
c. On opening nights, gala performances, and other occasions requiring

formal attire, women must be in a long gown or Filipino terno and the men should be
in suits or barongs. It is best to check in the invitation or tickets if there is prescribed
attire.


REFERENCES
Armed Forces of the Philippines (2002). Drills and Ceremonies. Manual on Drills and
Ceremonies, Part 1 and Part 2, pages 2-226
Education Dynamics (2020). Manual of Guidon. Army Study Guide Chapter 1 Flags,
Pages 1-4. Posted to
https://www.armystudyguide.com/content/army_board_study_guide_topics/flags/man
ual-of-the-guidon.shtml
Headquarters, Department of the Army Washington, DC, (2019). Ceremonies and

Parades. Army Regulations 600-25, Chapter 4, page 6. Posted to
https://www.benning.army.mil/Armor/316thCav/2-
16/ABOLC/content/pdf/Salutes,%20Honors,%20and%20Courtesy.pdf?17JUN2020
Philippine National Police (2003). Drills and Ceremonies. Philippine National Police
Manual on Drills and Ceremonies, Part 1 and Part 2, pages 1-259.
Naval Education and Training Command (June 2010). General Rules and
Information. NJROTC Drills Instruction Cards Package, General Rules, Information
and instructions for the Manual of the Guidon Cards G-1 thru G-15. Posted to
http://internet.savannah.chatham.k12.ga.us/schools/jhs/clubs/NJROTC/Shared%20D
ocuments/Operations%20(S-3)/Drill/Manual%20of%20the%20Guidon.pdf
University of Nebrasca- Lincoln, Department of Military Science (2020). Military

Customs and Courtesies, Big Red Battalion Handbook, Chapter 5, Pages 18-20.
Posted to https://www.unl.edu/armyrotc/HandbookChapters/Chapter5.pdf
-Never Abandon Hope-

REFERENCES 263
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Technical Working Group
SSUPT BELINDA B OCHAVE

Chairperson
CINSP MENANDRO B BASTIAN

SINSP NESTOR G BUTA
SINSP ARVIN JUDE A RAPANOT
SINSP ARVIN JAY B LAGUNA
INSP MAYSY V CATAQUIZ
INSP CESAR A MORFE JR
Support Staff
INSP MESON P ASING INSP LEI ANNE B PALERMO

INSP CLAIRE U BATAC INSP JOEBERT A SANAO
INSP DANIELLE P BAYLA INSP ROBERT S SUYOM
INSP MARVIN O BURAGA INSP GLORY R URSULUM
INSP JILL I ILUSTRISIMO INSP LINDON P NARVAZA
INSP RINA CIONIE L LEAL SFO2 Benjo C Carodan
SFO2 Clarissa P Relevante SFO2 Maribel M Caburian
FO1 Angelo A Alerge FO1 Noralden B Batua
FO1 Arni Jean D Emock FO1 Jeff M Luna
FO1 Glenn G Maranan FO1 Cherry M Panergayo
Chapter XIX Researchers and Contributors:
CINSP JOSIE G LISING

CINSP LYNELLE M MARBELLA
SINSP CHRISTINE M CASTILLO, MD
SINSP ROSEMARIE CATANEO
SINSP JANETH M LEQUIGAN
-Never Abandon Hope-

264 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
BUREAU OF FIRE PROTECTION

BFP Manual On Drills and Ceremonies 2020 Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BFP Manual On Drills and Ceremonies 2020 Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Department of Interior and Local Government

BUREAU OF FIRE PROTECTION

Modernization allowed us to perceive drills and ceremonies in another light. In

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

As part of the modernization of our bureau, we recognize the effectivity of

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

Message of the Chief, BFP i

Chapter Title Page

I GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION 1

II COMMANDS AND COMMAND VOICE 11

III INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITHOUT ARMS 19

IV INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITH ARMS 35

VII COMPANY DRILL 77

VIII BATTALION AND BRIGADE FORMATION 83

XII COLORS 121

XIII FLAG RAISING AND RETREAT CEREMONIES 135

XIV CHANGE OF COMMAND CEREMONY 139

XV OATH-TAKING CEREMONY 143

XVI OPENING/CLOSING AND GRADUATION 147

XVII MILITARY WEDDING 153

XVIII WREATH-LAYING CEREMONY 161

XIX FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES 167

XX PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL GRACES 185

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

1 Squad Formation (teams in line, elements in line) 59

2 Squad Formation (teams in column, elements in line) 59

3 Squad Formation (teams in file, elements in column) 59

4 Squad Formation (teams abreast, elements in file) 59

5 Platoon Formation (squads in column, elements in line) 68

6 Platoon Formation (squads in lines, elements in line) 68

7 Platoon Formation (squads in file, elements in file) 68

8 Platoon Formation (squads abreast, elements in file) 68

9 Company Formation (platoons in line, squads in column,

10 Company Formation (platoons in column, squads in column,

11 Company Formation (platoons in column, squads abreast,

12 Company Formation (company mass formation, company in

13 Battalion Formation (battalion in line, companies in line,

14 Battalion Formation (battalion in line, companies in line,

15 Brigade Formation (brigade in line, battalions in line,

16 Brigade Formation (brigade in line, battalions in line,

18 Battalion Formation with companies in line. 109

19 Battalion Formation with battalion in line. 110

20 Division Formation with Brigades in line, Battalion in mass. 110

21 Reviewing Officer Party. 111

22 Route to be followed by the troops. 113

23 Designated/Appointed area in the vestibule. 157

24 Designated/Appointed area in the altar. 157

26 Wreath-Laying Ceremony 163

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

The BFP Drills and Ceremonies Manual is designed to provide uniformity

c. Drills consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon,

d. Drills also increase the confidence of junior officers and non-

e. Ceremonies are formations and movements in which large numbers of

f. Finally, everyone gets a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything

BFP MANUAL ON DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

ALIGNMENT. It is a straight line upon which several elements or teams are

ARMS. This refers to rifles, pistols, or swords to be used in drills.

BASE. It is the element on which a movement is regulated.